Sony XDCAM HD PDW HD1500 User Manual

PROFESSIONAL DISC RECORDER  
PDW-HD1500  
OPERATION MANUAL [English]  
1st Edition  
CAUTION  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures  
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous  
radiation exposure.  
WARNING  
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones  
can cause hearing loss.  
In order to use this product safely, avoid prolonged listening at  
excessive sound pressure levels.  
This Professional Disc Recorder is classified as a CLASS 1  
LASER PRODUCT.  
Laser diode properties  
VAROITUS!  
Wave length: 400 to 410 nm  
Emission duration: Continuous  
Laser output power: 135 mW (max. of pulse peak), 65 mW  
(max. of CW)  
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ  
KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA  
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1  
YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.  
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)  
VARNING  
Egenskaber for laserdiode  
Bølgelængde: 400 til 410 nm  
Strålingsvarighed: Kontinuerlig  
Afgivet lasereffekt: 135 mW (maks stråletoppunkt), 65 mW  
(maks ved kontinuerlig stråling)  
OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA  
BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN  
UTSÄTTAS FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM  
ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.  
When installing, the installation space must be secured in  
consideration of the ventilation and service operation.  
• Do not block the ventilation slots at the left side, right side  
and bottom of front side panels, and vents of the fans.  
• Leave more than 25 cm of space in the rear of the unit.  
• Leave more than 2 cm of space in the left side, right side and  
top of the unit.  
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)  
Tekniska data för laserdiod  
Våglängd: 400 till 410 nm  
Emissionslängd: Kontinuerlig  
Laseruteffekt: 135 mW (max. för pulstopp), 65 mW (max. för  
kontinuerlig våg)  
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)  
For the customers in the USA  
Egenskaper for laserdiode  
Bølgelengde: 400 til 410 nm  
Strålingsvarighet: Uavbrutt  
Utgangseffekt for laser: 135 mW (maks av pulshøyde), 65  
mW (maks av CW)  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is  
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,  
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction  
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential  
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the  
user will be required to correct the interference at his own  
expense.  
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)  
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not  
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to  
operate this equipment.  
All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be  
shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device  
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.  
This label is located on the top panel of the drive unit.  
Denna etikett finns på ovansidan av driftenheten.  
Denne mærkat sidder på drevenhedens øverste panel.  
Tämä kyltti sijaitsee ajurilaitteen yläpinnalla.  
For the customers in Europe  
This product with the CE marking complies with both the EMC  
Directive and the Low Voltage Directive issued by the  
Commission of the European Community.  
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the  
following European standards:  
Dette merket er plassert på oversiden av driverenheten.  
• EN60065: Product Safety  
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)  
This product is intended for use in the following  
Electromagnetic Environment(s):  
CAUTION  
The use of optical instruments with this product will increase  
eye hazard.  
3
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3  
(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV  
studio).  
For the customers in Europe  
The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation, 1-7-1  
Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan.  
The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is  
Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327  
Stuttgart, Germany. For any service or guarantee matters  
please refer to the addresses given in separate service or  
guarantee documents.  
For the Customers in Taiwan only  
4
Table of Contents  
Using the editing functions of the recorder (controlling through  
5
Table of Contents  
Handling of discs when recording does not end normally (salvage  
functions) ................................................................................... 46  
6
Table of Contents  
7
Table of Contents  
Overview  
1
Chapter  
Long recording times  
PDW-HD1500 supports dual-layer Professional Discs (50  
GB). When dual-layer Professional Discs are used, this  
unit can record about 95 minutes.  
Features  
The PDW-HD1500 is a professional disc recorder  
supporting full HD (1920 × 1080) playback and recording  
Recording and playback functions  
1)  
with Professional Disc media.  
Support for multiple frame frequencies  
The unit can record and play back the frame frequencies  
1080/59.94i and 50i.  
When you use this unit in combination with a nonlinear  
2)  
editing system, the FAM function enables data file  
transfers between the unit and computers over the i.LINK  
interface, allowing the unit to be used like an external hard  
drive. The unit can be used as a player for video editing and  
program output, and as a recorder for nonlinear editing.  
For these applications, it can be connected to Sony  
nonlinear editors, monitors, and video equipment with  
HDSDI interfaces via its standard HDSDI I/O connectors.  
It has a compact, lightweight body for easy portability  
outdoors, and can be powered from any of three power  
HD downconvert function  
The unit is provided with a downconvert function. HD disc  
playback signals can be downconverted to SD signals and  
then output as SDSDI or composite signals. This allows  
you to use SD nonlinear editors and monitors for editing  
and program output.  
HDSDI remote recording  
3)  
sources: AC, DC, or battery power.  
HDSDI connections can be made to camcorders with  
remote HDSDI support (PDW-700 XDCAM HD422  
camcorder, HDW-730/730S/750/790/F900R HDCAM  
1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
2) FAM: File access mode  
1)  
3) BKP-L551 Battery Adaptor is required.  
camcorders) to enable recording synchronized to REC and  
STOP operations on the camcorder.  
1) HDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Features of this unit  
Recording of proxy AV data  
The principal features of this unit are as follows.  
Proxy AV data is a low-resolution (1.5 Mbps video, 64  
kbps per audio channel), MPEG-4 based version of a full  
resolution data stream. Whenever this unit records full  
resolution MPEG HD422 data, it simultaneously generates  
and records low-resolution proxy AV data. Because of its  
small size, proxy AV data can be transferred quickly over  
computer networks, easily edited in the field with laptop  
1)  
MPEG HD422 codec  
High-quality video and audio recording and  
playback  
The MPEG HD422 codec provides video compression  
compliant with the MPEG-2 422P@HL standard. It  
enables HD 4:2:2 (50 Mbps) digital component file  
recording in the 1080i (1,080 effective scanning lines,  
interlaced) format currently in use by many broadcast  
facilities.  
1)  
computers, and readily used in a wide variety of  
applications, such as content management on small-scale  
servers.  
1) The supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software can be used to create  
simple EDLs (Edit Decision Lists).  
Uncompressed PCM recording of 24-bit 48 kHz audio  
enables 8-channel audio recording at high sound quality.  
1) MPEG HD422 is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
9
Features  
           
High-speed searches with the jog and shuttle  
dials  
The jog and shuttle dials can be used to find scenes inside  
clips, in the same way as the jog and shuttle dials on  
conventional VTRs.  
In jog and variable modes, you can search in field units at  
from –2 to +2 times normal speed. Shuttle mode supports  
high-speed searches up to a maximum of 20 times normal  
speed. (F.FWD and F.REV are possible up to 35 times  
normal speed.)  
Tiltable front panel  
The front panel is tiltable for easy rack-mount and desktop  
operation. You can adjust the panel to the angle that makes  
the buttons easiest to use.  
Cart system support  
With its compact body, this unit can replace the SD PDW-  
1500 unit. You can mount this unit in the PDJ-C1080 and  
PDJ-A640 XDCAM cart systems.  
IT friendly  
Convenient disc-based playback and searching  
Like previous products in the XDCAM series, this unit  
supports a number of convenient search functions,  
including scene selection, thumbnail searches, essence  
marks searches, and expand searches.  
Scene selection: This function allows you to select clips  
from the disc and insert them into playlists. Clips can  
be inserted and played back in any order.  
Computer access to files (file access mode)  
Video and audio clip data are recorded as files. The FAM  
function enables quick random access by computers to the  
video, audio, and metadata files stored on Professional  
Discs, with the ability to display thumbnail lists on the  
computer screen and perform file-based reads and writes.  
Equipped with network connector  
Thumbnail searches: The unit creates thumbnails from  
the first frame of each generated clip, and displays  
them in thumbnail lists on the color LCD or an  
external monitor. You can cue up clips very easily by  
simply by selecting them from thumbnail lists.  
Essence mark searches: Essence marks can be recorded  
at any scene during or after recording. Lists of these  
marks can be displayed on the color LCD or an  
external monitor, allowing you to quickly find scenes  
that were marked for later reference.  
Expand searches: This function allows you to look inside  
the clip selected in a thumbnail screen, or inside the  
segment from a selected essence mark to the next  
essence mark. The selection range is divided into 12  
equal blocks, and the first frames of those blocks are  
displayed as thumbnails. By checking the thumbnails,  
you can easily find the scene you want.  
The unit features a Gigabit Ethernet connector as standard  
equipment. Via this connector, you can connect the unit to  
computers and networks to enable listing of the video,  
audio, and metadata files recorded on the Professional  
Disc, and rapid file transfers. Support for FTP commands  
makes it easy to carry out network file transfers from  
remote locations.  
The unit has two optical pickups for high-speed transfers.  
Supports a variety of interfaces  
This unit supports the following interfaces.  
• HDSDI video, 8-channel audio input and output  
• SDSDI video, 8-channel audio output  
• SD composite output  
• AES/EBU digital audio 4-channel input and output  
• Analog audio 2-channel input and output  
• Remote  
- RS-422A (D-sub 9-pin × 1)  
- Video remote (D-sub 9-pin × 1)  
TBC control is available from the front panel.  
Usability features  
1)  
AC, DC, and battery power support  
The unit can be used even where AC power is not  
available, for example outdoors or in cars or helicopters.  
1) BKP-L551 Battery Adaptor is required.  
Color LCD display  
The unit is equipped with a 16:9, 4.3-inch color LCD  
which allows you to check the contents of the disc and use  
the menu system without connecting an external monitor.  
Built-in speakers  
The unit features built-in speakers, allowing you to check  
recorded audio. You can check your clips and editing  
results on the color LCD and speakers even when no  
monitors or separate speakers are available.  
10  
Features  
   
System Configurations  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
OUT/IN  
Professional Discs  
PDW-700  
ANALOG  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT/INPUT  
• PFD23A  
• PFD50DLA  
HKDV-900  
a)  
HKDV-900 video control unit  
PDW-1500  
Sony BP-L80S/GL95  
battery  
SDSDI  
OUTPUT  
HDSDI  
INPUT  
VIDEO  
CONTROL  
BKP-L551 battery  
adaptor  
EJECT  
RM-280 editing  
controller  
REMOTE  
MARK1  
OUT  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
REMOTE (9P)  
CH-1  
CH-3  
MENU  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
CH-4  
DC IN 12V  
RESET  
REMOTE (9P)  
DC power source  
AC power source  
CHAPTER  
RETURN  
EXPAND  
- AC IN  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
BVE-700  
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT  
PHONES  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
SDSDI  
OUTPUT  
COMPOSITE  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
(AES/EBU)  
OUT/IN  
ANALOG  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT/  
INPUT  
HDSDI  
OUTPUT/  
INPUT  
Microphone  
SD video monitor  
Headphones  
HDSDI  
OUTPUT  
HDCAM  
HD video monitor  
Audio monitor  
REMOTE  
(9P) b)  
AUDIO  
MONITOR  
HDW-2000 series  
(i.LINK) S400  
PDW-F75  
Laptop computer  
a) If an HKDV-900 is connected, be sure to check that the  
version of the HKDV-900 is 2.00 or higher.  
b) For HDW-2000 series only.  
11  
System Configurations  
 
Names and Functions of  
Parts  
2
Chapter  
Front Panel  
The names and symbols of buttons and knobs on the front  
panel are color coded according to function.  
White: Function when the button or knob is operated  
independently.  
Orange: Function when the button is operated with the  
SHIFT button held down.  
Blue: Function related to thumbnail operations.  
1 On/standby button and  
Handle  
indicator  
EJECT  
7 Disc slot and EJECT  
button  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
2 ACCESS indicator  
IN  
OUT  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
2 Arrow buttons (see  
MENU  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
1 Audioleveladjustment  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
RESET  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
3 Remote control switch  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
3 Shuttle/jog/variable  
control section (see  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
4 KEY INHI switch  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
5 PHONES jack  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F REV  
F FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
6 LEVEL adjustment knob  
4 Display/menu control  
5 Recording and playback control section (see page 16)  
a On/standby (1) button and indicator  
When the POWER switch on the rear panel is in the @  
position, and when DC power is connected to the DC IN  
12V connector on the rear panel, this switches the unit  
between the operating state (the indicator is lit green) and  
the standby state (the indicator is lit red).  
lights continuously red. If a disc is loaded in the unit, the  
indicator flashes before changing to continuously lit red.  
When using this unit, normally leave the rear panel  
POWER switch in the @ (on) position, and use this button  
to switch the unit between the operating state and standby  
state.  
When the indicator is lit red, pressing the button switches  
this unit to the operating state, and the indicator lights  
continuously green.  
When the indicator is lit green, pressing the button  
switches the unit to the standby state, and the indicator  
b ACCESS indicator  
This lights when the disc is accessed and when a file is  
opened by a FAM or FTP connection (see page 74). If the  
on/standby button is pressed while this indicator is lit,  
12  
Front Panel  
             
access to the disc is completed before the unit switches to  
the standby state.  
1 Audio level adjustment section  
1 CH-1/ALL CH, CH-2 to CH-4 adjustment knobs  
Note  
CH-1  
CH-3  
While the ACCESS indicator is lit, do not turn off the  
POWER switch on the rear panel or disconnect the power  
cord. This could lead to a loss of data from the disc.  
ALL CH  
CH-2  
CH-4  
c Remote control switch  
Different positions of the switch allow different operations  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
as follows.  
NET: Enables access to the network. The indicator lights  
when an external network device is being accessed. In  
this state, operation from the front panel is not  
possible.  
LOCAL: Enables operation from the front panel.  
REMOTE: Enables remote control of this unit from the  
following devices:  
2 VARIABLE switch  
a CH-1/ALL CH, CH-2 to CH-4 (audio level)  
adjustment knobs  
Depending on the setting of the VARIABLE switch, these  
adjust the input audio or playback audio levels of channels  
1 to 4.  
By the setting of setup menu item 131 AUDIO VOLUME,  
you can enable the CH-1/ALL CH knob to simultaneously  
adjust all eight channels. When this simultaneous  
adjustment is enabled, the ALL CH indicator lights.  
• Devices connected to the REMOTE(9P) connector  
on the rear panel  
• Devices connected to the HDSDI INPUT connector  
with SDI remote control functions  
Use setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE to  
select which of the connectors is used for remote control  
b VARIABLE (audio level adjustment selector)  
switch  
This selects which of the input audio and playback audio  
has the level adjusted by the CH-1/ALL CH, and CH-2 to  
CH-4 adjustment knobs.  
REC: Adjust the input audio levels. The playback audio  
levels are fixed at their preset values.  
PRESET: The audio levels are fixed at their preset values.  
PB: Adjust the playback audio levels. The input audio  
levels are fixed at their preset values.  
See “Setup Menu” on page 90 for more information about  
how to make extended menu settings.  
d KEY INHI switch  
This turns key operation inhibit mode on or off.  
Use setup menu item 118 KEY INHIBIT SWITCH  
EFFECTIVE AREA to specify the keys to inhibit.  
e PHONES jack  
2 Arrow buttons  
The jack is a standard stereo jack. Connect stereo  
headphones to monitor the audio during recording,  
playback, and editing. (Non-audio signals are muted.) The  
monitored channel is selected with MONITR L and  
MONITR R on page P2 AUDIO of the function menu (see  
The four arrow buttons are also used as the MARK1  
button, MARK2 button, IN button, and OUT button. The  
correspondence with these buttons is as follows.  
V button: MARK1 button  
v button: MARK2 button  
B button: IN button  
b button: OUT button  
You can use these buttons for thumbnail selection, menu  
setting operations, setting In/Out points, and so on.  
f LEVEL (volume) adjustment knob  
Adjust the volume of headphones or speakers with the  
knob. You can also cause this to simultaneously adjust the  
output volume from the AUDIO MONITOR R, L  
connectors on the rear panel. To do this, set setup menu  
item 114 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT LEVEL to “var”.  
1 V/MARK1 button and v/MARK2 button  
2 IN indicator and OUT indicator  
MARK1  
g Disc slot and EJECT button  
Insert a disc in the disc slot. To remove the disc, press the  
EJECT button.  
IN  
OUT  
3 B/IN button and b/OUT button  
MARK2  
L/JOG  
13  
Front Panel  
                           
a V/MARK1 button and v/MARK2 button  
When the THUMBNAIL indicator (see page 15) is lit, you  
can use these for thumbnail selection.  
During recording or playback, a shot mark 1 or shot mark  
2 is recorded as an essence mark when you press the PUSH  
SET (S.SEL) knob with the V/MARK1 or v/MARK2  
button held down.  
Use the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software on the supplied  
XDCAM Application Software CD-ROM to delete and  
modify essence marks.  
Essence marks can also be deleted and modified from the  
Thumbnail Menu of the chapter thumbnail screen (see  
b VAR/JOG button  
Press this button, turning it on, to perform variable  
playback with the shuttle dial or jog playback with the jog  
dial.  
c Jog/shuttle transport indicators  
These show the playback direction in jog, shuttle, or  
variable speed mode.  
b (green): Lights during playback in the reverse direction.  
B (green): Lights during playback in the forward  
direction.  
x (red): Lights during still image display.  
d Jog dial  
b IN indicator and OUT indicator  
Turn this for playback in jog mode. Turn clockwise for  
forward direction playback, and counterclockwise for  
reverse direction playback. In jog mode, the playback  
speed varies from –1 to +1 times normal speed, according  
to the rotation rate of the jog dial. There are no detents.  
Normally, you press the SHTL/JOG or VAR/JOG button  
before turning the jog dial, but it is also possible to make a  
setting to enable jog mode directly by turning the dial (set  
setup menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL  
ENABLE to “dial”).  
IN indicator: When an In point is set, this lights. If an  
attempt is made to set the In point after a recorded Out  
point, this flashes.  
OUT indicator: When an Out point is set, this lights. If an  
attempt is made to set the Out point before a recorded  
In point, this flashes.  
c B/IN button and b/OUT button  
When the THUMBNAIL indicator (see page 15) is lit, you  
can use these for thumbnail selection.  
An In or Out point is set when you press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob with the B/IN or b/OUT button held  
down. The In or Out point setting is deleted when you  
press the RESET/RETURN button with the B/IN or b/  
OUT button held down.  
e Shuttle dial  
Turn this for playback in shuttle mode or variable speed  
mode. Turn clockwise for forward direction playback, and  
counterclockwise for reverse direction playback.  
• In shuttle mode, the playback speed varies in the range  
20 times normal speed, according to the angular  
position of the shuttle dial.  
3 Shuttle/jog/variable control section  
• In variable speed mode, you can finely adjust the  
playback speed from –2 to +2 times normal speed,  
according to the angular position of the shuttle dial.  
The shuttle dial has a detent at the center position, for still  
image playback.  
1 SHTL/JOG button  
2 VAR/JOG button  
3 Jog/shuttle transport indicators  
SHTL/JOG  
VAR/JOG  
Normally, you press the SHTL/JOG button before turning  
the shuttle dial, but it is also possible to make a setting to  
enable shuttle mode directly by turning the dial (set setup  
menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL  
ENABLE to “dial”).  
RESET  
RETURN  
Note  
5 Shuttle dial  
When setup menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH  
DIAL ENABLE is set to “dial”, after using the shuttle dial,  
return it to the center position. If the shuttle dial is not in  
the center position, it is possible occasionally for vibration  
from other operations to activate the dial, and start  
playback in shuttle mode.  
4 Jog dial  
For details of playback operations with these buttons and  
a SHTL/JOG button  
Press this button, turning it on, to perform shuttle playback  
with the shuttle dial or jog playback with the jog dial.  
14  
Front Panel  
                       
4 Display/menu control section  
information about how to use the thumbnail screens.  
5 RESET/RETURN button  
e RESET/RETURN button  
Functions as the RESET button or the RETURN button.  
RESET button: Reset counters or the setting values of the  
timecode generator. This button is also used to abort  
or cancel setup menu, scene selection, and thumbnail  
search operations.  
4 MENU button  
3 PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob  
1 Function buttons (F1 to F6)  
2 Display  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
DATA  
DATA  
RETURN button: In setup menu and GUI screens,  
returns to the previous procedure.  
CHAR SEL  
ON  
AES/EBU  
AES/EBU HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
0
0
0
0
59.94i  
422-1080  
50Mbps  
PB/EE  
EE  
MENU  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
S
8CH-24BIT  
REC INH  
OFF  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
RESET  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DEFAULT  
RM-9P  
CNTR SEL  
TC  
L
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
f SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button and indicator  
When pressed alone, functions as the SUB CLIP button.  
When pressed together with the SHIFT button, functions  
as the DISC MENU button.  
REPEAT  
RETURN  
PDW-HD1500  
59.94i HD422-1080 50Mbps 8CH-24BIT HD-SDI INPUT  
VITC VITC INT-PRESET R-RUN  
001/001 000:00  
TCG SET  
SHTL/JOG  
REM:020M  
PAGE  
12 34 47 12  
: : : .  
HOME  
HOME  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
SUB CLIP button: Press the button, lighting the  
indicator, to carry out playback in clip list order (see  
page 65). Jog and shuttle operations are supported  
during clip list playback. To return to playback in  
recording order, press the button again, turning the  
indicator off.  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F REV  
F FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
6 SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button and  
indicator  
7 THUMBNAIL button and indicator  
8 DISPLAY button  
9 SHIFT button  
Note  
0 PAGE/HOME button  
qa EXPAND button  
If no clip list is registered, this button does not light  
when pressed. The operation is invalid.  
qs CHAPTER button  
DISC MENU button: When pressed together with the  
SHIFT button, displays the Disc Menu (see page 72).  
Press the button again, turning the indicator off, to  
hide the Disc Menu.  
a Function buttons (F1 to F6)  
These buttons are enabled when the function menu (see  
page 39) is visible. Each press of a button changes the  
setting of the corresponding item in the menu.  
For convenience, this manual refers to these buttons as  
buttons F1 to F6, in order from the top.  
information about how to use the thumbnail screens.  
g THUMBNAIL button and indicator  
b Display  
To carry out a thumbnail search or create a clip list in the  
GUI screen, press this button turning the indicator on.  
Thumbnail images representing each clip or sub-clip  
appear. Press once more, turning the indicator off, to return  
to a whole-screen display.  
Displays menus, audio level meters, and data such as time  
data or clip information. The DISPLAY button lets you  
switch to the video monitor display.  
To display the thumbnails of essence mark frames (frames  
with an essence mark attached), hold down the SHIFT  
button, and press this button. The essence mark selection  
menu appears. Select the desired type of essence mark, and  
the corresponding essence mark frames appear in  
thumbnails. Press once more, turning the indicator off, to  
return to a whole-screen display.  
c PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob  
Use for menu and GUI screen operations. Turn the knob to  
select items, and press it to confirm the selection. This  
button is also used to set numerical and timecode values.  
information about how to use the thumbnail screens.  
information about how to use the thumbnail screens.  
d MENU button  
Displays the setup menu or the GUI screen menu. The  
setup menu appears when no GUI screen is visible. The  
same information is also superimposed on the display on a  
monitor connected to the unit. Press once more to return to  
the original display.  
h DISPLAY button  
Each press of this button switches between the basic  
operation display and video monitor display (see page 17).  
This button is disabled unless either the basic operation  
display or the video monitor display is displayed.  
15  
Front Panel  
                             
i SHIFT button  
5 Recording and playback control section  
Switches between functions for any button with two  
functions.  
1 PREV button  
2 PLAY button  
j PAGE/HOME button  
3 NEXT button  
When pressed alone functions as the PAGE switching  
button. When pressed together with the SHIFT button,  
functions as the HOME button.  
4 STOP button  
5 REC button  
PAGE button: Displays the function menu, if it is not  
already visible. (The most recently displayed page of  
the function menu appears.)  
HOME button: When pressed with the function menu  
visible, returns to the HOME page of the function  
menu.  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
TOP  
F REV  
F FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
6 STANDBY indicator  
7 REC INHI indicator  
k EXPAND button  
When pressed during thumbnail display, divides the  
selected clip into 12 blocks and displays a list of  
thumbnails of the first frame in each block (expand  
function). The division is repeated with each press (up to 3  
times, for a total of 1,728 blocks).  
When this button is pressed together with the SHIFT  
button, the unit returns to the previous division level.  
Press the RESET/RETURN button to return to the  
thumbnail screen.  
a PREV (previous) button  
Press this button, turning it on, to show the first frame of  
the current clip. While the first frame of a clip is shown,  
pressing this button jumps to the beginning of the previous  
clip. This button is also used together with other buttons  
for the following operations.  
Reverse direction high-speed search: Hold down the  
PLAY button, and press this button. A high-speed  
search in the reverse direction is carried out.  
This button also becomes a function button (F6) when the  
function menu is visible.  
Displaying the first frame of the first clip: Hold down  
the SHIFT button, and press this button.  
See page 59 for more information about the expand  
function.  
b PLAY button  
To start playback, press this button, turning it on.  
l CHAPTER button  
c NEXT button  
When pressed during thumbnail display, displays a list of  
thumbnails of the frames where essence marks are  
recorded (chapter function). When this is pressed again,  
returns to normal thumbnail display. The chapter function  
can be useful when essence mark thumbnails provide more  
information about the content of the clip than the index  
pictures of the first frames. This can also be used to cue up  
long clips.  
Press this button, turning it on, to jump to the next clip, and  
show the first frame. This button is also used together with  
other buttons for the following operations.  
Forward direction high-speed search: Hold down the  
PLAY button, and press this button. A high-speed  
search in the forward direction is carried out.  
Displaying the last frame of the last clip: Hold down the  
SHIFT button, and press this button.  
This button also becomes a function button (F5) when the  
function menu is visible.  
d STOP button  
To stop recording or playback, press this button, turning it  
on. The frame at the stop point appears.  
See page 60 for more information about the chapter  
function.  
The unit enters standby off mode when you press this  
button with the SHIFT button held down. It returns from  
standby off mode to the original state when you press this  
button again with the SHIFT button held down. (The lit or  
unlit status of the STOP button does not change.)  
Note  
This button flashes when setup menu item 105  
REFERENCE SYSTEM ALARM is set to “on” and the  
correct reference video input signal (as specified by OUT  
REF on page P5 REF of the function menu) is not being  
input.  
16  
Front Panel  
                     
This unit can automatically enter standby off mode  
whenever a specified time elapses in disc stop mode. For  
details, see the description of setup menu item 501 STILL  
TIMER (page 99).  
f STANDBY indicator  
Lights when the unit is in standby mode (STOP button and,  
STANDBY indicator lit).  
After a certain time passes in a disc stop mode, the unit  
automatically enters standby off mode and the indicator  
goes off.  
e REC (record) button  
To start recording, hold down this button, and press the  
PLAY button. The recording takes place on an unrecorded  
part of the disc.  
You can specify the time until the unit enters standby off  
mode. For details, see the description of setup menu item  
501 STILL TIMER (page 99).  
To stop recording, press the STOP button.  
To monitor in E-E mode  
g REC INHI (recording inhibit) indicator  
This lights in the following cases.  
• When a disc with recording inhibited is loaded.  
• When REC INH on the HOME page of the function  
menu is set to “ON”.  
You can press this button from stop mode to monitor input  
signals in E-E mode. The button lights when pressed. Press  
the STOP button to return to the original video.  
You can also press this button during playback and  
searches. E-E mode playback continues for as long as the  
button is held down.  
• The format of the recorded part of the disc does not  
match the system frequency settings of the unit.  
Display window  
Basic operation display  
1 Audio input display/  
Audio level meters  
DATA  
DATA  
CHAR SEL  
ON  
AES/EBU  
AES/EBU HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
0
0
0
0
6 Disc information  
59.94i  
422-1080  
50Mbps  
PB/EE  
EE  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
2 Function menu  
8CH-24BIT  
REC INH  
OFF  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
7 System information  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DEFAULT  
RM-9P  
CNTR SEL  
TC  
L
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 Clip information  
REPEAT  
PDW-HD1500  
59.94i HD422-1080 50Mbps 8CH-24BIT HD-SDI INPUT  
VITC INT-PRESET R-RUN  
001/001 000:00  
TCG SET  
SHTL/JOG  
VITC  
REM:020M  
4 Recording format  
12 34 47 12  
: : : .  
HOME  
5 Time data display area  
8 Reference signal  
9 Video input display  
a Audio input display/Audio level meters  
Displays information about audio.  
17  
Front Panel  
                   
b Function menu  
Use the PAGE/HOME button to display this menu, and to  
switch between the pages (HOME, P1 to P6) of the menu.  
Each page has three to six setting items. Press the  
corresponding button to change a setting.  
A Input signal display  
B Data indication  
DATA  
DATA  
AES/EBU  
AES/EBU HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
0
0
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
c Clip information  
Displays clip information.  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-60  
-60  
L
R
1
2
3
4
All remaining clips or clip list playback time  
Total number of clips recorded on disc  
F Level bar  
E Reference level  
D Audio channel  
PDW-HD1500  
001/001 000:00  
Number of current clip  
C Monitor channel  
Clip name  
A Input signal display: Displays the audio input signal.  
.
d Recording format  
Displays the system frequency and the video and audio  
formats.  
Display  
ANA-1  
ANA-2  
MIC-1  
MIC-2  
Input signal  
Analog audio  
signal  
Channel 1, 3  
Channel 2, 4  
Input signal from Channel 1, 3  
the microphone  
Channel 2, 4  
connected to  
59.94i HD422-1080 50Mbps 8CH-24BIT  
ANALOG  
AUDIO INPUT  
connector  
Audio format  
Video format  
System frequency  
AES/EBU  
HD-SDI  
SG  
AES/EBU format digital audio signal  
(flashes when there is no input signal)  
HDSDI audio signal (flashes when  
there is no input signal)  
e Time data display area  
Test signal from the internal signal  
generator  
A Remaining disc recording capacity  
B Rec Run/Free Run  
No indication Undefined audio signal, or no audio  
input  
C Timecode generator mode  
B Data indication: Appears when the input signals are  
non-audio signals.  
D VITC  
E Time data type  
C Monitor channel: Displays the audio monitoring  
channels set with MONITR L and MONITR R on  
page P2 AUDIO of the function menu (see page 40).  
D Audio channel: Displays the audio channels.  
Also indicates preset or variable mode by its color  
VITC  
VITC INT-PRESET R-RUN  
REM:020M  
12 34 47 12  
: : : .  
F Time data  
White: Preset mode  
Green: Variable mode  
E Reference level: Displays the reference level for  
recording as set in the maintenance menu.  
F Level bars: Display the audio recording or playback  
levels of channels 1 to 8. The OVER indicators light  
when the audio level exceeds 0 dB.  
A Remaining disc recording capacity: Displays the  
amount of recording capacity remaining on the disc.  
B Rec Run/Free Run: Displays the timecode run mode.  
The run mode is set with RUN MODE on page P4 TC  
of the function menu (see page 41).  
C Timecode generator mode: Displays the timecode  
source and generation method (preset or regenerate).  
18  
Front Panel  
       
These are set with PRST/RGN and TCG on page P4  
TC of the function menu (see page 41).  
D Audio format: Displays the audio format of the clips  
recorded on the disc.  
D VITC: Lights in the following cases.  
• When VITC is read in playback mode. (This has no  
relations to the display in the time data display area.)  
• When VITC recording is possible.  
g System information  
E Time data type: Displays the type of time data  
displayed in the time data display area. The type of  
time data is selected with CNTR SEL on the HOME  
page of the function menu (see page 40).  
A Power status  
B Menu setting status  
DEFAULT  
C Remote interface  
D Repeat mode  
RM-9P  
REPEAT  
Display  
TC  
Type of time data  
Timecode  
E Jog/shuttle dial mode  
SHTL/JOG  
COUNTER  
UB  
Elapsed recording/playback time  
User bits  
A Power status: Displays the status of the power supply  
to the unit.  
VITC  
VITC  
VIUB  
TCG  
VIUB  
Display  
Power status  
Timecode generator value  
User bits generator value  
AC power  
UBG  
Battery  
F Time data: Normally displays timecode or VITC,  
according to the selection made with TCR on page P4  
TC of the function menu.  
Battery almost exhausted: Flashes at 1 Hz  
Battery exhausted: Flashes at 4 Hz  
AC power (power-saving mode)  
Battery (power-saving mode)  
Battery (power-saving mode/low)  
f Disc information  
A Disc loaded indication  
B Menu setting status: Displays the current setting  
B System frequency  
59.94i  
status of setup menu.  
C Video format  
422-1080  
50Mbps  
Display  
Description  
D Audio format  
8CH-24BIT  
BANK1  
The current menu settings are the same  
as the settings in menu bank 1.  
A Disc loaded indication: Appears when a disc is loaded  
in this unit. When no disc is loaded, the usable format  
is displayed.  
BANK2  
The current menu settings are the same  
as the settings in menu bank 2.  
BANK3  
The current menu settings are the same  
as the settings in menu bank 3.  
The background color of the disc loaded mark  
indicates one of the following disc states.  
Blue: Disc capable of recording and playback.  
Yellow: Disc capable of playback only.  
Red: Disc incapable of recording and playback.  
DEFAULT  
The current menu settings are the same  
as the factory defaults.  
No display The current menu settings are different  
from all of the above.  
C Remote interface: When the remote control switch is  
set to REMOTE, displays the name of the interface  
selected with setup menu item 214 REMOTE  
INTERFACE.  
Note  
Even if the background is blue, recording is not  
possible in the following cases.  
D Repeat mode: Appears when setup menu item 142  
REPEAT MODE is set to “play”.  
E Jog/shuttle dial mode: Appears when the unit is in  
shuttle, jog, or variable mode.  
• When a disc with recording inhibited is loaded.  
• When REC INH on the HOME page of the function  
menu is set to “ON”.  
B System frequency: Displays the system frequency of  
the clips recorded on the disc.  
C Video format: Displays the video format and bitrate of  
the clips recorded on the disc.  
h Reference signal  
This displays the type of reference signal to which this unit  
is synchronizing.  
19  
Front Panel  
         
When there is no display, the unit is synchronizing to the  
internal reference signal.  
INPUT: Input video  
D Down-converter display: Displays the down  
converter mode set with the setup menu item 930  
DOWN CONVERTR MODE.  
HD REF: HD-format reference signal  
SD REF: SD-format reference signal  
DC-EC: Edge-crop mode  
DC-LB: Letter box mode  
DC-SQ: Squeeze mode  
Note  
The HD REF or SD REF display flashes when the video  
input signal is not synchronized to the reference signal, and  
when the signals are synchronized but their phases do not  
match.  
i Video input display  
This displays the currently selected video input signal.  
HDSDI: HDSDI video input  
Note  
The HDSDI display blinks when there is no video  
input signal, and when the video input signal does not  
match the system frequency of this unit.  
SG: Test video signal from the internal signal generator  
The video signal input is selected with V INPUT on  
page P1 VIDEO of the function menu (see page 40).  
Video monitor display  
A Audio level meters  
0
0
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-60  
-60  
1
2
3
4
TCR.00:45.39.18*  
JOG  
STILL  
DC-SQ  
B Superimposed information  
C Low battery warning  
D Down-converter display  
When you press the DISPLAY button, the display window  
changes to the video monitor display.  
A Audio level meters: LEVEL MT on page P2 AUDIO  
of the function menu decides whether the meter is to  
be displayed and on which side, left or right, it is  
displayed in the display window.  
B Superimposed information: Appears when CHAR  
SEL on the HOME page of the function menu is set to  
“ON” or “LCD”.  
C Low battery warning: Appears and flashes during  
operation with a battery pack when the battery power  
is almost exhausted.  
20  
Front Panel  
   
Rear Panel  
=
DC IN 12V  
POWER  
AC IN  
1 Power supply section (see  
REMOTE  
4 DC IN 12V connector  
5 REMOTE connector  
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT  
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT  
1
AUDIO MONITOR  
1
2
2
R
L
2 Analog audio signal input/  
output section (see  
4 HDSDI signal input/output  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
1
2
(SUPER)  
6 COMPOSITE OUTPUT1, 2  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
(SUPER)  
REF.VIDEO INPUT  
IN  
(SUPER) connectors  
3 Digital audio signal input/  
output section (see  
1
2
OUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
7 REF.VIDEO INPUT  
1
2
(SUPER)  
connectors  
1/2  
3/4  
TIME CODE  
MAINTENANCE  
S400  
VIDEO CONTROL  
REMOTE(9P)  
IN  
OUT  
5 Timecode input/output  
1
(i.LINK) S400 connector  
8
(network) connector  
2 VIDEO CONTROL connector  
9 MAINTENANCE connectors  
3 REMOTE(9P) connector  
0 SDSDI OUTPUT1, 2  
(SUPER) connectors  
a
(i.LINK) S400 connector (6-pin, IEEE1394  
compliant)  
e REMOTE connector (4-pin)  
Supplies power to the RM-280 Editing Controller.  
Connect a computer, or similar, using an i.LINK cable.  
f COMPOSITE OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER) (analog  
composite video output 1, 2 (superimpose))  
connectors (BNC type)  
Output analog composite video signals. You can  
superimpose timecodes, menu settings, or error messages  
on the output of the 2 (SUPER) connector when CHAR  
SEL on the HOME page of the function menu is set to ON.  
Notes  
• When this unit is connected to a device with a 6-pin  
i.LINK connector by an i.LINK cable, before  
unplugging the i.LINK cable, first power off the device  
and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. If the  
i.LINK cable is unplugged with the device power plug  
still connected, a current from an excessive voltage (8 to  
40 V) output from the i.LINK connector of the device  
flows into this unit. This may cause a failure of the unit.  
• When connecting this unit to a device with a 6-pin  
i.LINK connector, connect to the 6-pin i.LINK  
connector of the other device first.  
for more information about the CHAR SEL setting.  
g REF.VIDEO INPUT (reference video signal input)  
connectors (BNC type)  
The two connectors form a loop-through connection; when  
a reference video signal is input to the left connector, the  
b VIDEO CONTROL connector (D-sub-9-pin)  
Connect an HKDV-900 video control unit.  
same signal is input from the right connector (  
) to a  
connected device. When no connection is made to the right  
connector, the left connector is automatically terminated  
with an impedance of 75 ohms.  
c REMOTE(9P) (remote control 9-pin) connector  
(D-sub 9-pin)  
To control this unit from a controller or VTR supporting  
the RS-422A Sony 9-pin VTR protocol, connect the device  
to this connector.  
h
(network) connector (RJ-45 type)  
This is a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T  
connector for network connection.  
d DC IN 12V connector (XLR 4-pin, male)  
Connect to a DC power source of 12 V.  
CAUTION  
When using the BKP-L551 Battery Adaptor to mount a  
battery pack, connect the power cable of the BKP-L551.  
For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral  
device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this  
port. Follow the instructions for this port.  
21  
Rear Panel  
                   
i MAINTENANCE connectors  
2 Analog audio signal input/output section  
These are the USB connectors for maintenance.  
1 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 connectors  
Note  
2 ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT 1, 2  
connectors  
Do not connect USB devices to this unit for any purpose  
other than maintenance.  
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT  
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT  
1
AUDIO MONITOR  
R
1
2
2
L
j SDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER) (SDI signal outputs  
1, 2 (superimpose)) connectors (BNC type)  
These output SDSDI format video/audio signals.  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, audio signal  
output is eight channels with no switching, and RP188  
timecode output is set to on. You can change these settings  
with setup menu item 828 SDI AUDIO OUTPUT  
SELECT and setup menu item 920 SD-SDI H-ANC  
CONTROL.  
The output from the 2 (SUPER) connector can have  
timecode, menu settings, alarm messages, and other text  
information superimposed. To turn superimposition off,  
set CHAR SEL on the HOME page of the function menu  
to “OFF”.  
3 AUDIO MONITOR R, L connectors  
a ANALOG AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 connectors (XLR 3-  
pin, female)  
These input analog audio signals.  
With A1 INPUT or A2 INPUT on page P2 AUDIO, and  
A3 INPUT or A4 INPUT on page P3 AUDIO of the  
function menu (see page 41), you can select whether the  
signal input to connector 1 is assigned to audio channel 1or  
3, and whether the signal input to connector 2 is assigned  
to audio channel 2 or 4.  
You can set the reference input level with the maintenance  
menu item M37: AUDIO CONFIG (see page 108).  
(Factory default setting: +4 dB)  
information.  
Microphone settings  
If you have connected a microphone to this unit, you can  
set input level, AGC, and limiter values for the  
microphone with setup menu items 834, 839, 840, and 841  
for more information.  
1 Power supply section  
Note  
1 POWER switch  
An unpleasant sound may be output if you have connected  
a microphone to the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT 1 or 2  
connector and power the microphone on with the input  
level too high. Check the input level setting before  
connecting a microphone.  
2 - AC IN connector  
POWER  
AC IN  
b ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT 1, 2 connectors (XLR  
3-pin, male)  
These output analog audio signals.  
a POWER (main power) switch  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, the 1 connector  
is set to audio channel 1, and the 2 connector is set to audio  
channel 2. You can change these settings with setup menu  
item 824 ANALOG LINE OUTPUT SELECT (see  
You can set the output level with the maintenance menu  
item M37: AUDIO CONFIG (see page 108). (Factory  
default setting: +4 dB)  
Press the : side to power on the unit. Press the a side to  
power off.  
When using the unit, normally leave the POWER switch in  
the : (on) position, and use the on/standby button on the  
front panel to switch the unit between the operating state  
and standby state.  
Note  
Non-audio signals are muted.  
Before turning the main power off, always check to be sure  
that the unit is in the standby state, and then press the main  
power switch to the a side.  
c AUDIO MONITOR R, L connectors (XLR 3-pin,  
male)  
This outputs an audio signal for monitoring.  
The monitored channel is selected with MONITR L and  
MONITR R on page P2 AUDIO of the function menu.  
b -AC IN connector  
Connect to an AC power supply with the power cord (not  
supplied).  
22  
Rear Panel  
                         
for more information.  
You can superimpose timecodes, menu settings, error  
messages, or other information on the output of the HDSDI  
OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector with the setting for  
CHAR SEL on the HOME page of the function menu or  
with the setting for setup menu item 028 HD  
3 Digital audio signal input/output section  
CHARACTER. You can always disable to superimpose  
the data independent of the setting for CHAR SEL with the  
setting for setup menu item 028.  
1 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) IN 1/2, 3/4  
connectors  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
for more information about the CHAR SEL settings.  
OUT  
1/2  
3/4  
See page 93 for more information about the setup menu  
item 028 HD CHARACTER.  
2 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUT 1/2, 3/4  
connectors  
To treat the input and output signals of these connectors as  
non-audio signals, set the maintenance menu item M37:  
AUDIO CONFIG >M372: NON-AUDIO INPUT  
(recording) (see page 108) and setup menu item 823 NON-  
AUDIO FLAG PB (playback).  
a DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) IN (digital audio  
input) 1/2, 3/4 connectors (BNC type)  
These input AES/EBU format digital audio signals. The  
left connector (1/2) corresponds to audio channels 1 and 2,  
and the right connector (3/4) corresponds to audio  
channels 3 and 4.  
5 Timecode input/output section  
b DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUT (digital audio  
output) 1/2, 3/4 connectors (BNC type)  
1 TIME CODE IN connector  
These output AES/EBU format digital audio signals.  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, the 1/2  
connector is set to audio channel 1/2, and the 3/4 connector  
is set to audio channel 3/4. You can change these settings  
with setup menu item 827 AES/EBU AUDIO OUTPUT  
2 TIME CODE OUT  
connector  
TIME CODE  
IN  
OUT  
To treat the input and output signals of these connectors as  
non-audio signals, set the maintenance menu item M37:  
AUDIO CONFIG >M372: NON-AUDIO INPUT  
(recording) (see page 108) and setup menu item 823 NON-  
AUDIO FLAG PB (playback).  
a TIME CODE IN connector (BNC type)  
This inputs an SMPTE timecode generated by an external  
device.  
b TIME CODE OUT connector (BNC type)  
This outputs the following timecode, depending on the  
operating state of this unit.  
4 HDSDI signal input/output section  
During playback: Playback timecode  
1 HDSDI INPUT connector  
2 HDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER)  
During recording: The timecode from the internal  
timecode generator or the timecode input to the TIME  
CODE IN connector  
connectors  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
(SUPER)  
When setup menu item 611 TC OUTPUT PHASE IN EE  
MODE is set to “muting”, no timecode is output.  
a HDSDI INPUT (HDSDI signal input) connector  
(BNC type)  
This inputs an HDSDI format video/audio signal.  
b HDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER) (HDSDI signal  
output 1, 2 (superimpose)) connectors (BNC type)  
These output HDSDI format video/audio signals.  
When editing with two PDW-HD1500 units, connect a  
cable between these connectors on the player unit and the  
HDSDI INPUT connector on the recorder unit.  
23  
Rear Panel  
                       
Preparations  
3
Chapter  
For details on charging battery packs, refer to the  
operation manual for the battery charger.  
Preparing Power Sources  
Notes about battery usage  
• Before using the batteries, be sure to charge them fully  
with the special battery charger. Refer to the operating  
instructions for your battery charger for more  
information about how to charge the batteries.  
• Batteries may not be completely charged if you charge  
them immediately after use when they are still warm.  
You should wait until the batteries cool before charging  
them.  
This unit can be powered by AC power, DC power, or a  
battery pack.  
Note  
If you load or remove a battery pack incorrectly, it may fall  
and cause bodily injury. Follow the procedures described  
below to load or remove them.  
Attaching a battery pack  
Supplying power  
Attaching and removing of the BP-GL95 Battery Pack is  
described below.  
The BP-L80S can also be attached and removed in the  
same way.  
AC power supply  
Connect the AC IN connector to an AC power source using  
the specified AC power cord. To supply AC power to the  
unit, set the on/standby button on the front panel to ON and  
the POWER switch on the rear panel to = (ON).  
For details on attaching the BKP-L551, refer to the  
installation manual for the BKP-L551.  
DC power supply  
1
Attach the BKP-L551 to the side panel.  
Connect the DC IN 12V connector to a DC power source.  
To supply DC power to the unit, set the on/standby button  
on the front panel to ON and the POWER switch on the  
rear panel to OFF. If the POWER switch on the rear panel  
is set to = (ON), AC power is supplied.  
Battery power supply  
Battery packs that can be used with this unit are as follows.  
To use battery pack, a BKP-L551 Battery Adaptor and a  
BC-L100 Battery Charger are also required.  
• BP-L80S  
BKP-L551  
• BP-GL95  
2
Align the grooves on the BP-GL95 with the  
projections on the BKP-L551.  
Continuous recording time at room temperature  
BP-GL95 lithium-ion battery pack: 80 minutes (95  
minutes when used in power save mode)  
24  
Preparing Power Sources  
                     
Initial Setup  
This unit is shipped with the area of use, system frequency,  
recording format, and current date and time still unset.  
Therefore, you need to make initial setup settings before  
using the unit. (You cannot use the unit without setting it  
up.)  
BP-GL95  
Once the unit has been set up, the settings are retained even  
when the unit is powered off.  
3
Slide the BP-GL95 as shown below so that the  
connectors on the BP-GL95 and the BKP-L551 are  
connected.  
Use the following procedures.  
POWER  
AC IN  
1
EJECT  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
OUT  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
MENU  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
4
Connect the DC cable of the BKP-L551 to the DC IN  
12V connector.  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
RESET  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
Removing the battery pack  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
With the lever pushed in, slide the BP-GL95 out as shown  
below.  
5,6  
2,3,4 5  
1
Power the unit on.  
The INITIAL SETUP screen appears on the display.  
RETURN  
INITIAL SETUP  
UC/J MODEL  
SELECT  
Lever  
NONE  
Checking the remaining battery power  
You can use the LEDs on the side panel of the battery to  
check the remaining power of the battery.  
SET  
INC/DEC : CTRL.KNOB  
F1(RET)  
F5(SET)  
CANCEL&PREV :  
SET&NEXT :  
INIT  
2
3
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select the area of  
use.  
Display UC (for regions outside Japan) or J (for  
Japan), and then press the SET function button (F5).  
The system frequency screen appears.  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select the system  
frequency.  
25  
Initial Setup  
             
RETURN  
RETURN  
INITIAL SETUP  
INITIAL SETUP  
SYSTEM FREQUENCY  
SELECT  
Push F5(SAVE) Key!!  
1080/50i  
SET  
SET  
INC/DEC : CTRL.KNOB  
F1(RET)  
F5(SET)  
CANCEL&PREV :  
SET&NEXT :  
CANCEL&PREV :  
SAVE&REBOOT :  
F1(RET)  
F5(SET)  
INIT  
INIT  
Display the system frequency that you want to use, and  
then press the SET function button (F5).  
The DATE/TIME PRESET screen appears.  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears again, and  
the setting screen disappears. Then the unit powers  
itself off and on again.  
To return to the original screen without saving  
settings  
Press the RETURN function button (F1).  
4
In the DATE/TIME PRESET screen, set the current  
date and time by setting the following items.  
RETURN  
DATE/TIME PRESET  
Note  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
2008  
11  
19  
The time zone is reset to the factory default when you  
execute the maintenance menu item M49: RESET ALL  
SETUP. You will need to set it again. The date and time  
are not reset.  
TIME 16:49:00  
TIME ZONE UTC+00:00  
SET  
INC/DEC : CTRL.KNOB  
SHIFT : (P)(p)KEY  
CANCEL&PREV :  
SET&NEXT :  
F1(RET)  
F5(SET)  
INIT  
YEAR: Year  
MONTH: Month  
DAY: Day  
TIME: Time  
TIME ZONE: Time zone (as a difference in hours  
with respect to Coordinated Universal Time  
(UTC))  
In the setting screen, you can change the value of the  
flashing digit.  
Press the B/IN or b/OUT button to make the previous  
digit or next digit start flashing.  
Press the V/MARK1 or v/MARK2 button (or turn the  
PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob) to increment or decrement  
the value of the flashing digit.  
When you have finished making settings, press the  
SET function button (F5).  
The date, time, and time zone settings are saved, and  
the message “NOW SAVING...” appears.  
5
If you want to save the settings made up to this point,  
press the SET function button (F5) again.  
26  
Initial Setup  
   
To change the angle of the front panel  
To change the angle to position 2 from position 1, pull the  
front panel out to position 2.  
To change the angle to position 1 from position 2, first  
unlock the front panel by pulling it all the way out to the  
return position. Then return it to position 0, and pull out  
again to position 1.  
Front Panel Tilt  
Mechanism  
The front panel of this unit has a tilt mechanism that allows  
you to pull the front panel out and adjust it to a convenient  
angle.  
To pull the front panel out  
Grasp the holds (small protrusions) on both sides of the  
front panel and pull out as indicated by the arrow.  
You can fix the angle of the front panel in position 1 (15  
degrees) or position 2 (40 degrees).  
Return position  
Position 2 (40 degrees)  
Position 1 (15 degrees)  
Position 0  
Note  
The angle cannot be fixed if you pull the front panel past  
position 2 all the way out to the return position. To fix the  
front panel, return it to position 0 and then pull it out to  
position 1 or position 2.  
To return the front panel to its original  
position  
Unlock the front panel by pulling it out to the return  
position. You can then return it to position 0.  
27  
Front Panel Tilt Mechanism  
           
Settings on this unit  
Connections and  
Settings  
Remote control switch: NET (see page 13)  
Setup menu item 257 NETWORK ENABLE: net  
Connecting three PDW-HD1500 units to a laptop  
computer via a LAN  
Note  
PDW-HD1500  
Production of some of the peripherals and related devices  
described in this chapter has been discontinued.  
For advice about choosing devices, please contact your  
Sony dealer or a Sony sales representative.  
Laptop computer  
Connections for using PDZ-1 Proxy  
Browsing Software  
LAN  
You can use the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software on the  
supplied XDCAM Application Software CD-ROM to  
carry out simple editing with proxy AV data.  
Network cable  
(not supplied)  
For an overview of PDZ-1 and how to install the software,  
page 126. For information about how to use the software,  
refer to the Help provided in the software.  
To  
connector  
(network)  
Settings on all PDW-HD1500  
Using the  
connection)  
The following shows an example of an FTP (File Transfer  
Protocol) connection.  
(network) connector (FTP  
Remote control switch: NET (see page 13)  
Setup menu item 257 NETWORK ENABLE: net  
Using the S400 (i.LINK) connector (FAM  
connection)  
Note  
The following shows an example of a FAM (file access  
mode) connection.  
To use PDZ-1 requires the PDW-HD1500 IP address and  
other network-related settings to be made beforehand.  
For details of the network-related settings, see “To change  
Note  
The PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software must be installed in  
advance.  
The required FAM driver is also installed when you install  
the PDZ-1 software.  
Connecting this unit directly to a laptop computer  
PDW-HD1500 (this unit)  
Laptop computer  
for more information about installing the PDZ-1 software.  
Some limitations apply to FAM connections. For details,  
To  
(network) connector  
Network cable (not supplied)  
28  
Connections and Settings  
                       
Use of a shielded cable is recommended.  
PDW-HD1500 (this unit)  
Laptop computer  
To S400 connector  
i.LINK cable (not supplied)  
Connections for cut editing  
The following figure shows a cut editing system  
comprising this unit as a player.  
When making the connections, also refer to the manuals  
provided with the equipment to be connected.  
See page 31 for more information about editing control  
unit settings.  
When using an editing control unit  
Using BVE-700/700A  
The following figure shows a cut editing system  
comprising this unit as a player, an HDW-M2000/M2000P  
unit as a recorder, and a BVE-700/700A as an editing  
control unit.  
29  
Connections and Settings  
     
1: 75Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
HD video monitor  
2: 9-pin remote control cable (not supplied)  
To HDSDI input connector  
HDSDI OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER)  
1
PDW-HD1500  
(this unit, player)  
=
DC IN 12V  
POWER  
AC IN  
REMOTE  
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT  
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT  
1
AUDIO MONITOR  
1
2
2
R
L
REF.VIDEO  
INPUT  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
Reference video signal  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
1
2
(SUPER)  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
(SUPER)  
REF.VIDEO INPUT  
IN  
1
2
REF.VIDEO  
INPUT  
OUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
(SUPER)  
1/2  
3/4  
TIME CODE  
MAINTENANCE  
S400  
VIDEO CONTROL  
REMOTE(9P)  
IN  
OUT  
1
HDSDI  
REMOTE(9P)  
OUTPUT1  
2
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
HDSDI  
INPUT  
1
HDW-M2000 (recorder)  
PLAYER-1  
75Ω  
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
SDI OUT  
SDI IN  
AC IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT2  
VIDEO  
OUT1  
AUX/  
TITLE  
RECORDER  
PLAYER-2  
PLAYER-1  
PLAYER-1  
PLAYER-3  
1
SWER  
MIXER  
RECORDER  
PLAYER-3  
PLAYER-2  
NETWORK  
PANEL  
GPI  
EDL  
REF VIDEO IN  
REF  
RECORDER  
VIDEO IN  
BVE-700/700A  
(editing control unit)  
HDSDI  
OUTPUT 3  
(SUPER)  
REMOTE 1-IN(9P)  
To HDSDI input  
connector  
1
2
HD video monitor  
HDW-M2000 (recorder) settings  
BVE-700/700A (editing control unit)  
setting  
Settings on this unit  
REMOTE 1 (9P) button: Lit  
SYNCHRONIZE menu:OFF  
Remote control switch: REMOTE (see  
REF.VIDEO INPUT connector 75 Ω  
termination switch: OFF  
Setup menu item 214 REMOTE  
INTERFACE: 9PIN  
Audio selection function switching button  
INPUT button: HDSDI  
Function menu HOME >F1 (VID. IN): SDI  
Function menu page 1 >F1 (TCG): INT  
Function menu page 1 >F2 (PR/RGN):  
PRESET  
Function menu page 1 >F3 (RUN): FREE  
30  
Connections and Settings  
Editing Control Unit Settings  
When connecting an editing control unit (BVE-700/700A/  
2000/9100) to use with this unit, set VTR constants as  
follows.  
.
System  
frequency  
VTR CONSTANT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
07  
07  
11  
FE  
FE  
12  
00  
00  
13  
80  
80  
14  
5A  
4C  
15  
FF  
FF  
16  
5A  
4B  
59.94i  
50i  
A0  
A1  
96  
96  
00  
00  
96  
7D  
15  
15  
15  
15  
03  
03  
80  
80  
0A  
0A  
Using RM-280  
The following figure shows a cut editing system  
comprising this unit as a player, an HDW-M2000/M2000P  
unit as a recorder, and an RM-280 as an editing controller.  
1: 75Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
HD video monitor  
2: 9-pin remote control cable (not supplied)  
To HDSDI input connector  
HDSDI OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER)  
1
=
POWER  
AC IN  
DC IN 12V  
PDW-HD1500 (this unit, player)  
REMOTE  
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT  
1
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT  
1
AUDIO MONITOR  
2
2
R
L
REF.VIDEO  
INPUT  
1
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
1
2
Reference video signal  
(SUPER)  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
(SUPER)  
REF.VIDEO INPUT  
IN  
1
2
REF.VIDEO  
INPUT  
OUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
(SUPER)  
1/2  
3/4  
TIME CODE  
MAINTENANCE  
S400  
VIDEO CONTROL  
REMOTE(9P)  
IN  
OUT  
1
HDSDI  
REMOTE(9P)  
OUTPUT1  
2
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
HDSDI  
INPUT  
1
HDW-M2000 (recorder)  
REMOTE(9P)  
RECORDER(DEVICE2)  
75Ω  
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
RM-280  
(editing  
controller)  
(
)
REMOTE 9P  
REC TALLY  
OUTPUT  
REF  
IN OUT  
DC IN  
/
(
)
1
(
)
2
RECORDER DEVICE  
PLAYER DEVICE  
RS232C  
REMOTE(9P)  
RECORDER(DEVICE1)  
REF IN/OUT  
2
HDSDI  
OUTPUT 3  
(SUPER)  
REMOTE 1-IN(9P)  
1
To HDSDI input  
connector  
1
HD video monitor  
HDW-M2000 (recorder) settings  
RM-280 (editing controller) settings  
Settings on this unit  
REMOTE 1 (9P) button: Lit  
EDITOR/REMOTE CONTROL selector  
switch: EDITOR  
Remote control switch: REMOTE (see  
31  
Connections and Settings  
     
HDW-M2000 (recorder) settings  
RM-280 (editing controller) settings  
Settings on this unit  
REF.VIDEO INPUT connector 75 Ω  
termination switch: OFF  
Setup menu 01 PREROLL: 5s  
Setup menu item 214 REMOTE  
INTERFACE: 9PIN  
Audio selection function switching button Setup menu 05 SYNC SEL: ON  
INPUT button: HDSDI  
Function menu HOME >F1 (VID. IN): SDI Setup menu 06 SYNC VTR:  
RECORDER  
Function menu page 1 >F1 (TCG): INT  
Setup menu 09 EDIT DLY: AUTO  
Setup menu 10 R ST DLY:AUTO  
Function menu page 1 >F2 (PR/RGN):  
PRESET  
Function menu page 1 >F3 (RUN): FREE Setup menu 11 P ST DLY:AUTO  
HD video monitor  
Using the editing functions of the  
recorder (controlling through  
REMOTE(9P) connector)  
To HDSDI input connector  
1
The following figure shows a cut editing system  
comprising this unit as a player, and an HDW-M2000/  
M2000P unit as a recorder. In this example, video and  
HDSDI  
OUTPUT2  
PDW-HD1500  
(SUPER)  
(this unit, player)  
=
DC IN 12V  
POWER  
AC IN  
audio signals are connected by HDSDI, and control signals  
REMOTE  
are transferred via the REMOTE(9P) connector.  
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT  
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT  
1
AUDIO MONITOR  
1
2
2
R
L
REF.VIDEO  
INPUT  
Reference  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
HDSDI INPUT  
HDSDI OUTPUT  
video signal  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
1
2
(SUPER)  
1
COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
(SUPER)  
REF.VIDEO INPUT  
IN  
1
2
OUT  
SDSDI OUTPUT  
1
2
(SUPER)  
1/2  
3/4  
REF.VIDEO  
INPUT  
TIME CODE  
MAINTENANCE  
S400  
VIDEO CONTROL  
REMOTE(9P)  
IN  
OUT  
1
HDSDI  
REMOTE(9P)  
OUTPUT1  
HDW-M2000  
(recorder)  
REF VIDEO  
INPUT  
HDSDI  
INPUT  
1
75Ω  
2
HDSDI  
OUTPUT 3  
(SUPER)  
REMOTE 1-OUT(9P)  
To HDSDI  
input  
1
connector  
HD video monitor  
1: 75Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
2: 9-pin remote control cable (not supplied)  
32  
Connections and Settings  
   
HDW-M2000 (recorder)  
setting  
Settings on this unit  
REMOTE 1 (9P) button: Lit Remote control switch:  
Setup menu item 214  
REMOTE INTERFACE: 9PIN  
For details of HDW-M2000/M2000P settings, refer to the  
HDW-M2000/M2000P Operation Manual.  
Connections for pool coverage  
The following figure shows an example of connections for  
pool coverage, with the PDW-700 Professional Disc  
Camcorder connected.  
PDW-HD1500 (this unit)  
PDW-700  
To SDI OUT 1 connector  
To HDSDI INPUT connector  
75Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
PDW-700 (camcorder)  
setting  
Settings on this unit  
HDSDI REMOTE I/F on  
page CAM CONFIG 1 of  
the MAINTENANCE menu:  
other than OFF  
Remote control switch:  
Setup menu item 214  
REMOTE INTERFACE: SDI  
33  
Connections and Settings  
   
Synchronization Reference Signals  
The synchronization reference signal generator of this unit  
synchronizes to a reference signal input to the REF.  
VIDEO INPUT connector or to a video input signal.  
External synchronization is as follows, depending on the  
setting of OUT REF on page P5 REF of the function menu,  
and on the type of the selected input signal. Video output  
signals are always synchronized to the internal  
synchronization signal.  
b)  
Input to HDSDI INPUT Input to REF. VIDEO  
connector  
Setting of OUT REF on page P5 REF  
REF  
a)  
INPUT connector  
INPUT  
Yes  
Yes  
Synchronize to the signal input to Synchronize to the signal input to  
the REF. VIDEO INPUT connector the HDSDI INPUT connector  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Synchronize to the signal input to the HDSDI INPUT connector  
Synchronize to the signal input to the REF. VIDEO INPUT connector  
No external synchronization is made  
a) Same as when V INPUT on page P1 VIDEO of the function menu is set  
to “SG”.  
b) FAM and FTP connections always synchronize to the internal  
synchronization reference signal, regardless of the setting of OUT REF.  
34  
Synchronization Reference Signals  
     
The first digit of the time data display starts flashing.  
Setting Timecode  
<
,
-
There are the following four ways of recording timecode:  
Internal Preset mode: This records the output of the  
internal timecode generator, set beforehand to an  
initial value. The following run modes can be  
selected.  
+
SET  
EXIT  
• Free Run: Timecode advances continually.  
• Rec Run: Timecode advances only during  
recording.  
12 34 47 12  
TCG SET  
: : : .  
Internal Regen mode: This records the output of the  
internal timecode generator, initialized to timecode  
following continuously upon the timecode of the last  
frame of the last clip on the disc.  
External Regen mode: This records the output of the  
internal timecode generator, synchronized to an  
external timecode generator. As the external input, the  
timecode input to any of the following connectors can  
be selected.  
• TIME CODE IN connector: TC  
• HDSDI INPUT connector: LTC  
External Preset mode: This directly records the input of  
an external timecode generator. As the external input,  
the timecode input to any of the TIME CODE IN  
connector can be selected.  
3
4
Press the T or t function button (F1 or F2) to select  
a digit to be set.  
The selected digit starts flashing.  
Use the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob or – or + function  
button (F3 or F4) to set the value for the selected digit.  
To set the next-most significant digit (10s place)  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob while holding down  
the SHIFT button.  
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set all digits that should be set.  
To set to 00:00:00:00  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
To record timecode after setting an initial  
value (Internal Preset)  
Proceed as follows with the function menu. For setting the  
timecode, set TCG on page P4 TC of the function menu to  
INT and PRST/RGN to PRESET.  
5
Press the SET function button (F5) .  
If RUN MODE on page P4 TC is set to FREE RUN,  
the timecode starts running.  
To cancel a setting  
Press the EXIT function button (F6). Any new settings to  
that point are canceled, and the setting operation is  
terminated.  
EJECT  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
OUT  
DATA  
DATA  
CHAR SEL  
ON  
Setting the timecode to the current time  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
AES/EBU  
AES/EBU HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
0
0
0
0
59.94i  
422-1080  
50Mbps  
PB/EE  
EE  
MENU  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
8CH-24BIT  
ALL CH  
REC INH  
OFF  
VAR/JOG  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
CH-2  
RESET  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DEFAULT  
RM-9P  
CNTR SEL  
TC  
L
1
2
R
3
4
5
6
7
8
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
1
2
Set RUN MODE on page P4 TC to FREE RUN and  
DF/NDF to DF (in 59.94i mode only).  
REPEAT  
RETURN  
PDW-HD1500  
001/001 000:00  
TCG SET  
SHTL/JOG  
59.94i HD422-1080 50 8CH-24BIT HD-SDI INPUT  
VITC VITC INT-PRESET R-RUN  
REM:020M  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
12 34 47 12  
: : : .  
SET  
HOME  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
Perform steps 1 to 4 of “Setting an initial timecode  
value” to set the timecode to a time slightly ahead of  
the current time.  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
Time data display area  
Function menu  
Function buttons  
3
Press the SET function button (F5) at the instant when  
the current time matches the displayed timecode.  
Setting an initial timecode value  
Setting user bits  
You can record up to 8 hexadecimal digits of information  
(date, time, event number, etc.) on the timecode track.  
Select UB by pressing the CNTR SEL function button (F4)  
in step 1 of “Setting an initial timecode value” and carry  
1
2
Press the CNTR SEL function button on the HOME  
page of the function menu, and select TC.  
Press the TCG SET function button (F5).  
35  
Setting Timecode  
               
out steps 2 to 5. Settings are made in hexadecimal (0-9,  
A-F).  
You can record ID codes in user bits.  
Executing either of these procedures starts the internal  
timecode generator running in synchronization with the  
external timecode generator.  
Once the internal timecode generator is synchronized with  
the external timecode generator, the internal timecode  
generator continues to run even if the external timecode  
generator connection is removed.  
The timecode advance mode is set automatically to Free  
Run. The frame count mode (for system frequency 59.94i  
only) is set to the same mode as the external timecode  
signal (drop-frame or non-drop-frame).  
To record timecode that follows  
sequentially upon the last recorded  
timecode (Internal Regen)  
You can record timecode so that it is continuous from one  
clip to the next on the disc.  
Set TCG on page P4 TC of the function menu to INT, and  
PRST/RGN to TC or VITC. When this setting is in force,  
the unit reads the timecode of the last frame of the last  
recorded clip on the disc before starting to record, and  
internally generates timecode that follows upon the  
recorded timecode.  
The frame count mode (for system frequency 59.94i only)  
is set to the same mode as the last recorded timecode on the  
disc (drop-frame or non-drop-frame).  
To check the synchronization to the external  
signal  
Press the STOP button to stop this unit, then press the REC  
button.  
Check that the timecode value shown in the time data  
display coincides with the external timecode value.  
To record external timecode directly  
(External Preset)  
When you use this method, the internal timecode generator  
advances without being affected by the external timecode.  
To record with the internal timecode  
generator synchronized to external  
timecode (External Regen)  
Use this method to synchronize the timecode generators of  
a number of recorders, to record the playback timecode of  
external VTRs, or to record while maintaining  
synchronization between the source video and timecode.  
Use either of the following procedures according to the  
type of external timecode.  
To directly record timecode input to the TIME  
CODE IN connector  
Connect the timecode output of an external device to the  
TIME CODE IN connector, and make the following  
settings on page P4 TC of the function menu.  
• Set TCG to “EXT”.  
• Set PRST/RGN to “PRESET”.  
Synchronizing with timecode input to the TIME  
CODE IN connector  
1
Connect the timecode output of an external device to  
the TIME CODE IN connector, and input a reference  
video signal to the REF. VIDEO INPUT connector.  
2
Make the following settings on page P4 TC of the  
function menu.  
• Set TCG to “EXT”.  
• Set PRST/RGN to “TC”.  
Synchronizing with embedded LTC input to the  
HDSDI INPUT connector  
1
Connect an HDSDI signal containing embedded LTC  
to the HDSDI INPUT connector, and input a reference  
video signal to the REF. VIDEO INPUT connector.  
2
Make the following settings on page P4 TC of the  
function menu.  
• Set TCG to “SDI”.  
• Set PRST/RGN to “TC”.  
36  
Setting Timecode  
     
a Type of time data  
Display  
CNT  
TCR  
UBR  
TCR.  
UBR.  
TCG  
UBG  
IN  
Meaning  
Superimposed Text  
Information  
Counter data  
TC reader timecode  
TC reader user bits data  
VITC reader timecode  
VITC reader user bits data  
TC generator timecode  
TC generator user bits data  
In point time data  
The video signal output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT  
2 (SUPER) connector, SDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER)  
connector, or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector  
contains superimposed text information, including  
timecode, menu settings, and alarm messages.  
OUT  
DUR  
Out point time data  
Adjusting the text display  
You can adjust the position, size and type of the  
superimposed text using setup menu items 002, 003, 005,  
009, 011, and 012.  
Duration between In point and Out point  
Note  
If the time data or user bits data cannot be read correctly,  
they will be displayed with an asterisk. For example,  
“T*R”, “U*R”, “T*R.” or “U*R.”.  
Information displayed  
b Timecode reader drop-frame mark (for 59.94i  
mode only)  
“.”: Indicates drop-frame mode.  
1 Type of time data  
2 Timecode reader drop frame mark  
“:”: Indicates non-drop-frame mode.  
(for 59.94i mode only)  
c Timecode generator drop-frame mark (for 59.94i  
mode only)  
“.”: Indicates drop-frame mode (factory default setting).  
“:”: Indicates non-drop-frame mode.  
3 Timecode generator drop  
frame mark (for 59.94i  
mode only)  
d VITC field mark  
“ ” (blank): Fields 1 and 3 (for 59.94i mode) or fields 1, 3,  
5 and 7 (for 50i mode)  
“*”: Fields 2 and 4 (for 59.94i mode) or fields 2, 4, 6 and  
8 (for 50i mode)  
Time data  
4 VITC field mark  
T C R  
0 0  
:
0 4  
.
4 7  
.
0 7 *  
e Operation mode  
P L A Y  
L O C K  
The field is divided into two blocks as shown below.  
• Block A displays the operation mode.  
• Block B displays the servo lock status or playback speed.  
6 Playback condition  
mark  
5 Operation mode  
Note  
A
B
The display shown above corresponds to the factory  
default settings of the unit. You can change the type of  
information to be displayed in the lower line of the display  
by changing the setting of setup menu item 005 DISPLAY  
INFORMATION SELECT.  
Display  
Operation mode  
Block A  
Block B  
DISC OUT  
LOADING  
Disc is not loaded.  
Disc is being loaded.  
Disc is being unloaded.  
Standby off mode  
Stop mode  
UNLOADING  
STANDBY OFF  
STOP  
37  
Superimposed Text Information  
       
To display playback condition marks, set setup menu item  
012 CONDITION DISPLAY ON VIDEO MONITOR to  
“ena”, and set setup menu item 005 DISPLAY  
INFORMATION SELECT to “T&sta”.  
Display  
Operation mode  
Block A  
NEXT xxx  
Block B  
Cuing up to the first frame of the  
next clip.  
PREV xxx  
Cuing up to the first frame of the  
current clip.  
F.FWD  
F.REV  
PLAY  
PLAY  
REC  
Fast forward search  
Fast reverse search  
Playback condition displays  
You can be alerted in advance to deteriorating playback  
conditions and to error correction rates which are  
approaching their limits.  
Deteriorating playback may be due to the following  
causes.  
• Scratches and dust on the disc surface  
This includes fingerprints, dust from the air, tar from  
cigarette smoke, and so on.  
Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are  
not a problem because they are registered in advance as  
defects, and recording avoids them. However, scratches  
and soiling which occur after recording can lead to  
deteriorating playback conditions.  
Playback mode (servo unlocked)  
Playback mode (servo locked)  
Record mode (servo unlocked)  
Record mode (servo locked)  
A still picture in jog mode  
Jog mode in forward direction  
Jog mode in reverse direction  
A still picture in shuttle mode  
Shuttle mode  
LOCK  
REC  
LOCK  
STILL  
FWD  
REV  
JOG  
JOG  
JOG  
SHUTTLE STILL  
SHUTTLE (Speed)  
VAR  
VAR  
STILL  
A still picture in variable mode  
Variable speed mode  
(Speed)  
• Aging of disc recording layers  
TOP 0001/xxxx  
END xxxx/xxxx  
PREROLL  
Cuing up to the first frame of the  
first clip.  
Over several decades, the recording layers of optical  
discs can age and cause deteriorating playback  
conditions.  
You can use this function to check archival discs and  
other discs which have been stored for extended periods,  
so that you can take action before the deterioration  
progresses further.  
• Deteriorating laser diodes performance  
The performance of the laser diodes used in optical  
heads can worsen with age, leading to deteriorating  
playback conditions.  
Cuing up to the last frame of the  
last clip.  
Cuing up during thumbnail search  
f Playback condition mark  
One of three channel condition marks is displayed when  
the ACCESS indicator is lit during any mode except  
recording. The three channel condition marks indicate the  
following three stages.  
Display  
Name  
Description  
For details, see “Digital hours meter” (page 114) about  
this setting.  
Green  
condition  
There is no problem with the  
playback condition. This unit and  
the disc can be used just as they  
are. This corresponds to the  
“green” channel condition  
indicator of a VTR.  
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate  
guide to when it is time to replace optical heads.  
Yellow  
condition  
The playback condition has  
deteriorated to some degree.  
There are no read errors, but you  
should take the action described  
in the next section. This  
corresponds to the “yellow”  
channel condition indicator of a  
VTR.  
To prevent playback conditions from  
deteriorating  
Pay attention to the following points when handling discs.  
• Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with  
your hands.  
• Do not store for long periods in locations which are  
dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans.  
• Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or  
in locations exposed to direct sunlight.  
Red  
condition  
The playback condition has  
deteriorated. There are no read  
a)  
errors, but you should take the  
action described in the next  
section. This corresponds to the  
“red” channel condition indicator  
of a VTR.  
If playback conditions have deteriorated  
If a yellow or red playback condition mark appears, check  
the following points.  
Whether the disc displays the same playback condition  
on other XDCAM devices: If so, the surface of the  
disc may be dirty or scratched, or the performance of  
a) Read errors will occur if the playback condition continues to deteriorate.  
If a read error occurs, a “Disc Error!” alarm appears in the time data  
display, the picture freezes, and audio is muted.  
38  
Superimposed Text Information  
   
the recording layers on the disc may have worsened  
due to age. Do not use discs with these symptoms.  
Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device  
displays the same playback conditions: If so, the  
performance of the laser diodes may have  
Basic Operations of the  
Function Menu  
deteriorated. Check the total optical output time.  
The function menu provides access to frequently used  
settings, such as input video signal selection and timecode  
settings.  
Menu settings are stored in nonvolatile memory and are  
preserved even after the unit is powered off.  
Function menu operations  
The function menu appears on the color LCD of this unit.  
The following figure shows the buttons (numbered 1 to 6  
beginning at the top) used in function menu operations.  
Function buttons (1 to 6)  
Function menu  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
DATA  
DATA  
CHAR SEL  
ON  
AES/EBU  
AES/EBU HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
0
0
0
0
59.94i  
422-1080  
50Mbps  
PB/EE  
EE  
MENU  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
S
8CH-24BIT  
REC INH  
OFF  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
RESET  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DEFAULT  
RM-9P  
CNTR SEL  
TC  
L
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
REPEAT  
RETURN  
PDW-HD1500  
59.94i HD422-1080 50Mbps 8CH-24BIT HD-SDI INPUT  
VITC VITC INT-PRESET R-RUN  
001/001 000:00  
TCG SET  
SHTL/JOG  
REM:020M  
PAGE  
12 34 47 12  
: : : .  
HOME  
HOME  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
THUMBNAIL  
PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob  
DISPLAY button  
PAGE/HOME button  
To display the function menu  
The function menu is made up of the HOME page and  
pages P1 to P6.  
If the function menu is not already visible, press the  
PAGE/HOME button to display it. (The most recently  
accessed function menu page appears.)  
To display a different page  
Each press of the PAGE/HOME button displays the next  
function menu page in the order: HOME tP1 t P2 t  
P3 t P4 t P5 t P6 t HOME…  
To clear the function menu from the screen  
Press the DISPLAY button to switch to the video monitor  
display.  
To change the setting of a function menu  
item  
Use the function buttons.  
Press the button to the left of each setting item to change  
the value of the item. Keep pressing the button until the  
value you want appears.  
39  
Basic Operations of the Function Menu  
         
Item  
Setting  
Function menu settings  
F2: VID. PROC  
Selects the method used to control the  
internal video signal processor and make  
related settings.  
LOCAL: Use the function menu to  
change settings.  
The following tables list the setting items on each page and  
describe their setting values. Underlined values are the  
factory defaults.  
MENU: Use the setup menu to change  
settings.  
HOME page  
F3: VIDEO  
Sets the output level for HD/SD video  
signals (range –to +3 dB).  
PRESET: Set the video signal output  
level to a preset value, regardless of  
manual setting.  
Manual setting: While the setting value  
is flashing, turn the PUSH  
Item  
Setting  
F1: CHAR SEL  
Turns the display of character  
information on the color LCD and on an  
external monitor on and off.  
ON: Character information on  
OFF: Character information off  
LCD: Character information on for the  
color LCD only  
SET(S.SEL) knob to adjust the video  
signal output level.  
F4: CHROMA  
Sets the output level for HD/SD chroma  
signals (range –to +3 dB).  
PRESET: Set the chroma signal output  
level to a preset value, regardless of  
manual setting.  
F2: PB/EE  
Selects the type of video and audio  
signals to output during fast forward, fast  
reverse, stop, and standby.  
PB: Playback signal  
EE: E-E signal  
Manual setting: While the setting value  
is flashing, turn the PUSH  
F3: REC INH  
Specifies whether to inhibit recording to  
the disc.  
OFF: Do not inhibit recording.  
ON: Inhibit recording to the disc  
according to the setting of setup  
menu item 310 REC INHIBIT.  
SET(S.SEL) knob to adjust the  
chroma SETUP signal output level.  
F5: HUE/CHRM Sets the hue (chroma phase).  
PHS  
PRESET: Set the hue (chroma phase) to  
a preset value, regardless of manual  
setting.  
F4: CNTR SEL  
F5: TCG SET  
Selects the type of time data to display in  
the time data display area.  
TC: Timecode  
COUNTER: Elapsed recording or  
playback time  
Manual setting: While the setting value  
is flashing, turn the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob to adjust the hue  
(chroma phase) over the range  
30°.  
UB: User bits  
F6: SETUP/  
BLACK  
Sets the HD/SD output black setup level  
or black level.  
PRESET: Set the level to the preset  
value, regardless of the manual  
setting.  
Manual setting: While the setting value  
is flashing, turn the PUSH  
• When CNTR SEL is set to “TC” ,  
displays a screen where you can set  
the initial value of the timecode  
generated by the internal timecode  
• When CNTR SEL is set to “UB” ,  
displays a screen where you can set  
timecode user bits (see page 35).  
a)  
SET(S.SEL) knob to set the black  
setup level (in 59.94i mode) over the  
range 30 IRE or the black level (in  
50i mode) over the range 210 mV.  
a)  
F6:  
(Unassigned function button)  
a) This is displayed only when TCG on page P4 TC of the function menu is  
set to “INT”, and PRST/RGN is set to “PRESET”.  
P2 AUDIO page  
P1 VIDEO page  
Item  
Setting  
F1: A1 INPUT  
Selects the audio input signal to assign  
to audio channel 1.  
Item  
Setting  
SDI: Audio signal embedded into SDI  
F1: V INPUT  
Selects the video input signal.  
HDSDI: HDSDI signal  
signal  
ANALOG1: Analog 1 audio signal  
AES/EBU: Signal input to the DIGITAL  
AUDIO(AES/EBU) IN 1/2 connectors  
SG: Test signal from internal signal  
generator (Normally this item is not  
displayed. It appears when you hold  
the button down for 3 seconds. The  
test signal is assigned to audio  
channels 1 to 8 simultaneously.)  
i.LINK: i.LINK signal (when optional  
board is installed)  
SG: Test signal from internal signal  
generator (Normally this item is not  
displayed. It appears when you hold  
the button down for 3 seconds.)  
40  
Basic Operations of the Function Menu  
             
Item  
Setting  
Item  
F5:  
Setting  
F2: A2 INPUT  
Selects the audio input signal to assign  
to audio channel 2.  
(Unassigned function button)  
(Unassigned function button)  
F6:  
SDI: Audio signal embedded into SDI  
signal  
ANALOG2: Analog 2 audio signal  
AES/EBU: Signal input to the DIGITAL  
AUDIO(AES/EBU) IN 1/2 connectors  
P4 TC page  
Item  
Setting  
F3: MONITR L  
F4: MONITR R  
Selects the channel to monitor as the left  
monitor channel.  
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7,  
CH8  
CH1/2, CH3/4, CH5/6, CH7/8 (MIX)  
F1: TCG  
Selects the timecode signal to which the  
internal timecode generator  
synchronizes.  
INT: Follow the initial value set from the  
control panel or remotely from the  
device connected to the  
Selects the channel to monitor as the  
right monitor channel.  
REMOTE(9P) connector, or  
synchronize to timecode played  
back from the disc.  
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7,  
CH8  
CH1/2, CH3/4, CH5/6, CH7/8 (MIX)  
EXT: Synchronize to external timecode  
input to the TIME CODE IN  
connector.  
SDI: Synchronize to timecode  
embedded into HDSDI signal input  
to HDSDI INPUT connector.  
F5: SPEAKER  
F6: LEVEL MT  
Enables or disables output from this  
unit’s speaker.  
OFF: Do not output  
ON: Output  
Specifies the position at which to  
superimpose audio level meters in the  
video monitor screen (in full-screen  
display mode).  
F2: PRST/RGN Selects the following for the internal  
timecode generator.  
PRESET: Presets an initial value for the  
timecode generated by the internal  
timecode generator, as specified  
from the control panel or remotely  
from the device connected to the  
REMOTE(9P) connector. This is  
valid when “INT” is selected with the  
F1: TCG item on this page. The  
operation is the same as “TC” when  
anything else is selected.  
TC: Generate timecode synchronized to  
timecode read by the internal  
timecode reader.  
VITC: Generate timecode synchronized  
to VITC read by the internal  
OFF: Do not superimpose.  
LEFT: Superimpose the audio level  
meters of 2 channels on the left side.  
RIGHT: Superimpose the audio level  
meters of 2 channels on the right  
side.  
LEFT(4): Superimpose the audio level  
meters of 4 channels on the left side.  
RIGHT(4): Superimpose the audio level  
meters of 4 channels on the right  
side.  
LEFT(8): Superimpose the audio level  
meters of 8 channels on the left side.  
RIGHT(8): Superimpose the audio level  
meters of 8 channels on the right  
side.  
timecode reader.  
F3: RUN MODE Selects the timecode run mode.  
FREE RUN: Timecode advances as long  
as the unit is powered on, regardless  
of the unit’s operating state.  
P3 AUDIO page  
REC RUN: Timecode advances only  
during recording. When you select  
this item, also set F1: TCG on this  
page to “INT” and set F2: PRST/  
RGN to “PRESET”.  
Item  
Setting  
F1: A3 INPUT  
Selects the audio input signal to assign  
to audio channel 3.  
SDI: Audio signal embedded into SDI  
signal  
ANALOG1: Analog 1 audio signal  
AES/EBU: Signal input to the DIGITAL  
AUDIO(AES/EBU) IN 3/4 connectors  
F4: DF/NDF  
Selects the drop-frame mode for the  
internal timecode generator and the  
counter in 59.94i mode.  
DF: Drop-frame mode  
NDF: Non-drop-frame mode  
F2: A4 INPUT  
Selects the audio input signal to assign  
to audio channel 4.  
F5:  
(Unassigned function button)  
SDI: Audio signal embedded into SDI  
signal  
ANALOG2: Analog 2 audio signal  
AES/EBU: Signal input to the DIGITAL  
AUDIO(AES/EBU) IN 3/4 connectors  
F6: TCR  
Selects the type of timecode to display in  
the time data display area.  
TC: Display TC.  
VITC: Display VITC.  
F3:  
F4:  
(Unassigned function button)  
(Unassigned function button)  
41  
Basic Operations of the Function Menu  
       
P5 REF page  
Handling Discs  
Item  
Setting  
F1: OUT REF  
Selects the reference signal for the  
output signals of this unit.  
REF: Use the signal input to the  
REF.VIDEO INPUT connector as the  
output reference signal.  
INPUT: Use the input video signal as the  
output reference signal.  
Discs used for recording and  
playback  
This unit can record and play back the following  
1)  
F2:  
(Unassigned function button)  
(Unassigned function button)  
(Unassigned function button)  
Professional Disc formats.  
• PFD23A (capacity 23.3 GB)  
• PFD50DLA (capacity 50.0 GB)  
F3:  
F4:  
1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
F5: SYNC  
Sets the sync phase of HD output  
signals. While the setting value is  
flashing, turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob to adjust the sync phase of output  
signals with respect to the input  
reference signal, over the range 15 µs.  
(The display shows –128 to +127.)  
Notes  
• It is not possible to use the following discs for recording  
or playback:  
-Blu-ray Disc  
F6: FINE  
Makes fine adjustment to the sync phase  
of HD output signals. While the setting  
value is flashing, turn the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob to adjust the sync  
phase of output signals with respect to  
the input reference signal, over the range  
200 ns. (The display shows 0 to 1023.)  
-Professional Disc for Data  
• PFD50DLA discs can be used only by XDCAM devices  
with the DL mark (see the following illustration). They  
cannot be used by XDCAM devices without this mark.  
P6 OTHER page  
DL mark  
Item  
Setting  
F1: CONV IMP  
Selects whether to display convert status  
on the display during downconvert  
operations.  
Notes on handling  
OFF: Do not display.  
ON: Display.  
Handling  
The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge, and is  
designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or  
fingerprints. However, if the cartridge is subjected to a  
severe shock, for example by dropping it, this can result in  
damage or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched, it  
may be impossible to record video/audio, or to play back  
the content recorded on the disc. The discs should be  
handled and stored carefully.  
F2: ERR LOG  
Displays an error log screen.  
(Unassigned function button)  
(Unassigned function button)  
(Unassigned function button)  
(Unassigned function button)  
F3:  
F4:  
F5:  
F6:  
• Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the  
cartridge.  
• Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage.  
• Do not disassemble the cartridge.  
• The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for  
indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct position.  
Storage  
• Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct  
sunlight, or in other places where the temperature or  
humidity is high.  
• Do not leave cartridges where dust may get inside.  
• Store cartridges in their cases.  
Care of the discs  
• Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using  
a soft dry cloth.  
42  
Handling Discs  
               
• If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry before  
use.  
Formatting a disc  
Unused discs are formatted automatically when they are  
loaded into this unit.  
To format a recorded disc, use the GUI screen.  
Write-protecting discs  
To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental  
erasure, move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of  
the disc in the direction of the arrow, as shown in the  
following figure.  
Lower surface of the disc  
Write Inhibit tab  
E
V
A
S
Slide in the direction of the arrow  
Write Inhibit tab settings  
SAVE  
SAVE  
Recording disabled  
Recording enabled  
You can also write protect individual clips. For details, see  
Loading and unloading a disc  
When the on/standby button and indicator are lit green,  
you can load and unload a disc as shown in the following  
figure.  
On/standby button and indicator  
To unload  
Press the EJECT button.  
To load  
Insert a disc face up.  
The disc is drawn in.  
43  
Handling Discs  
                   
Recording and Playback  
4
Chapter  
Carrying out recording  
Recording  
One recording segment (from the start to the end of  
recording) is called a “clip”.  
This section describes video and audio recording on the  
unit.  
See “Clips” (page 65) for more information about clips.  
Chapter 3 for more information.  
1
about setup menu operations.  
EJECT  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
OUT  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
Note  
MENU  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
RESET  
It is not possible to combine material recorded in different  
system frequencies and audio recording formats on a  
single disc. If you attempt to record material in a system  
frequency or audio recording format that differs from that  
of existing recorded material on the disc, REC INHI  
indicator lights and recording is inhibited.  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
2 3  
Make the following settings and adjustments before  
starting to record.  
Video input signal selection: Select with V INPUT on  
page P1 VIDEO of the function menu.  
Audio input signal selection: Select with A1 INPUT and  
A2 INPUT on page P2 AUDIO, A3 INPUT and A4  
INPUT on page P3 AUDIO of the function menu.  
Timecode and user bits settings: See “Setting Timecode”  
Selection of time data to display: Select with CNTR SEL  
on HOME page of the function menu.  
Selection of audio channels to monitor: Select with  
MONITR R and MONITR L on page P2 AUDIO of  
the function menu.  
1
2
Insert a disc.  
Hold down the REC button, and press the PLAY  
button.  
Recording starts.  
3
To stop recording, press the STOP button.  
If the disc becomes full  
Recording stops and the message “ALARM DISC END.”  
appears on the monitor.  
Notes  
Volume adjustment of the monitor audio: Adjust with  
the LEVEL knob.  
• The shortest clip that can be recorded is 2 seconds long.  
Even if recording start and stop operations are performed  
within 2 seconds, a 2-second clip is recorded.  
Remote/local setting: Set the remote control switch. If  
you set it to REMOTE, also set setup menu item 214  
REMOTE INTERFACE (“RM-” and the connector  
used appear on the system information of the display)  
44  
Recording  
           
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded is  
300. If the loaded disc already contains 300 clips,  
recording with the REC button is not possible. (The  
message “MAX # Clips” appears in the time data display  
area.)  
• This unit can record video input signals that are not  
synchronized to a reference signal. However, in that  
case, video breakup and audio noise may occur in E-E  
playback.  
You can also set shot marks during playback. See page 48  
for the procedure.  
Recording with the HDSDI remote  
control function  
This section explains the settings required for recording in  
HDSDI remote control mode, and how the unit operates in  
this mode.  
• During recording, do not turn off the POWER switch on  
the rear panel or disconnect the power cord. This could  
cause the clip being recorded to be lost.  
Note  
The unit (camcorder) that controls this unit must also  
support HDSDI remote output.  
To adjust the audio recording levels  
Settings  
Set setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE to  
“SDI”, and set the remote control switch on the front panel  
to “REMOTE”.  
This unit enters HDSDI remote control mode, in which it  
is controlled by command packets received via the HDSDI  
INPUT connector.  
When carrying out audio recording at a reference  
level  
Set the VARIABLE switch to PRESET.  
The audio signals will be recorded at a preset reference  
level.  
You can change the reference level and the input levels  
with maintenance menu item M37: AUDIO CONFIG.  
Note  
See page 110 for more information about how to make  
maintenance menu settings.  
The following limitations apply in HDSDI remote control  
mode.  
• Commands received via the REMOTE(9P) connector  
are ignored.  
• Recording and playback operations on the front panel  
are disabled, except for the EJECT button.  
Manually adjusting the audio recording levels  
Set the VARIABLE switch to REC and adjust the CH-1/  
ALL CH and CH-2 to CH-4 knobs so that the audio level  
indications on the audio level meters do not exceed 0 dB  
for a maximum volume. Carry out the adjustment in E-E  
mode.  
Monitor display in HDSDI remote control mode  
“RM-SDI” appears in the remote interface display area  
(see page 19) of the monitor. This display lights if  
command packets are embedded into HDSDI signals, and  
flashes if they are not. However, the “RM-SDI” continues  
to flash until the time the controlling camcorder is powered  
on and the time that the REC button is pressed on the  
camcorder.  
See setup menu item 108 AUTO EE SELECT for more  
information about the signal output settings in E-E mode  
To set shot marks  
A Shot Mark1 essence mark or Shot Mark2 essence mark  
is set if you hold down the V/MARK1 or v/MARK2  
button and press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob during  
recording.  
If the unit is set up to display superimposed text  
information (see page 37), “SHOTMARK1” or  
“SHOTMARK2” appears every time you set an essence  
mark.  
Recording operation  
When a recordable disc is inserted, recording (or stop) is  
executed according to the REC (or STOP) command  
embedded into the HDSDI signals.  
Recording stops automatically when the end of the disc is  
reached.  
When Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2 essence marks are set,  
you can search for the shot marks by displaying  
thumbnails of the frames at those positions (see page 61).  
You can also use shot mark positions as edit points during  
scene selection operations (see page 65).  
When HDSDI signals are interrupted during  
recording  
Recording stops if HDSDI signals are interrupted during  
recording, for example because the HDSDI cable is  
disconnected or the controlling camcorder is powered off.  
When HDSDI signal input is restored, the unit resumes  
45  
Recording  
             
operation according to the embedded REC or STOP  
command.  
Notes  
• Even after recording finishes, do not set the POWER  
switch on the rear panel to off until the ACCESS  
indicator has gone out.  
• These functions salvage as much recorded material as  
possible after an unforeseen accident, but 100%  
restoration cannot be guaranteed.  
Exchanging discs  
Even during recording, it is possible to eject discs by  
pressing the EJECT button on the front panel. After a disc  
is exchanged, the unit resumes operation according to the  
embedded REC or STOP command.  
• When recording on the PDW-HD1500 does not end  
successfully, you can use another XDCAM system to  
perform a full salvage of the disc. As the other system,  
use the PDW-700.  
• The following alarm message (see page 117) may  
appear when you insert a disc:  
Note  
This unit begins recording operation about one second  
after the camcorder.  
“DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED. FORMAT DISC  
OR CONTACT SERVICE TO RUN CLIP SALVAGE  
PROGRAM. (XXXX)”  
This message means that recording on that disc did not  
end normally. The “XXXX” in the message is a code for  
XDCAM devices that can salvage the disc. Refer to the  
following table and use one of the indicated devices to  
salvage the disc.  
Handling of discs when recording  
does not end normally (salvage  
functions)  
Recording processing does not end normally if, for  
example, the POWER switch on the rear panel is turned off  
during recording, or if the power cord is disconnected  
during recording. Because the file system is not updated,  
video and audio data recorded in real time is not  
recognized as files and clip contents recorded up to that  
point are lost.  
However, this unit has salvage functions which can hold  
losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such  
discs. There is a quick salvage function which executes  
automatically and a full salvage function which you can  
execute as required.  
Code (XXXX)  
Model  
0002  
PDW-1500/530/510/R1  
PDW-F70/F350/F330  
PDW-F75/F355/F335  
PDW-HD1500/700  
0200  
a)  
0300  
a) Does not appear on this unit.  
• Even when these functions are used, it is not possible to  
recover data from immediately before the interruption of  
recording. The amount of data lost is as follows.  
Quick salvage: From 2 to 4 seconds of data before the  
interruption of recording.  
Full salvage: From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the  
interruption of recording.  
(More data may be lost when the unit is subject to  
vibrations, and when you switch frequently between  
recording and paused.)  
• You are prompted to execute a full salvage every time  
you insert a disc that has not been salvaged, or power the  
unit on with such as disc loaded.  
• No recording is possible on discs containing clips that  
have not been salvaged, although it is possible to play  
back the normally recorded sections. Recording  
becomes possible if you perform a quick format, but this  
erases all of the original recorded content.  
Quick salvage: Clips are reconstructed on the basis of  
backup data stored in nonvolatile memory and  
markers recorded on the disc. Processing time is about  
5 seconds.  
Quick salvage executes automatically if the unit is  
powered on with a disc still loaded after recording  
was interrupted by power off.  
Full salvage: Clips are reconstructed on the basis of  
markers recorded on the disc. Nonvolatile memory  
cannot be used, so processing takes longer than for a  
quick salvage (about 30 seconds, although it depends  
on the state of the disc).  
You are prompted to execute a full salvage whenever  
you insert a disc that was removed manually from a  
powered off device after interruption of recording by  
power off.  
Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the on/  
standby button on the front panel is set to standby during  
recording, because the unit does not enter standby mode  
until after the end of recording processing.  
To restore clips with a full salvage  
1
Insert the disc on which recording did not end  
normally.  
The message “Salvage ?” appears on the display.  
46  
Recording  
           
To cancel the clip salvage  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
Playback  
Notes  
This section describes playback of video and audio on the  
unit.  
• The message “EJECT?” appears when “REC INHI”  
is displayed. If the disc is write protected, eject the  
disc, set the Write Inhibit tab to enable recording,  
and then insert the disc again. If REC INH on  
HOME page of the function menu is set to “ON”, set  
it to “OFF” (see page 40).  
Before starting playback, make the following settings and  
adjustments.  
Selection of time data to display: Select with CNTR SEL  
on HOME page of the function menu.  
Selection of audio channels to monitor: Select with  
MONITR L and MONITR R on page P2 AUDIO of  
the function menu.  
• This operation cannot be cancelled once it begins.  
2
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Processing begins and the message “Executing.”  
appears.  
Volume adjustment of the monitor audio: Adjust with  
the LEVEL knob.  
When processing finishes, a message appears to  
display the results.  
If the message reads “Incomplete!”, the clips that  
failed were lost.  
Remote/local setting: Set the remote control switch. If  
you set it to REMOTE, also set setup menu item 214  
REMOTE INTERFACE (“RM-” and the connector  
used appear on the display) (see page 98).  
Disc playback start position  
Although this unit uses optical discs, it is designed to offer  
the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs.  
One of these is the playback start position, which works in  
the same way as tape, as described below.  
After playback stop  
The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was  
pressed.  
Press the PLAY button to resume playback at the stop  
position.  
After recording  
The unit stops at the position where recording ended.  
To play back a clip, press the PREV button to move to the  
start frame of any clip or press the PREV button with the  
PLAY button held down to move to any position.  
After disc insertion  
The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most  
recently ejected.  
Press the PLAY button to resume playback at the most  
recent position.  
The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is  
ejected, which allows playback to start at that position  
whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player.  
Note  
This function is not available when the Write Inhibit tab of  
the disc is set to the recording disabled position, and when  
REC INH on HOME page of the function menu is set to  
“ON”.  
The REC INHI indicator may light when neither of the  
above is true if the format of recorded sections on the disc  
47  
Playback  
       
is not the same as the recording settings of this unit. In this  
case, the playback position can be saved to the disc.  
EJECT  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
OUT  
To specify the frame to use as the  
thumbnail image  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
MENU  
ARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
RESET  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
You can display a list of thumbnails of all clips on a disc,  
and use it to check the recorded content (see page 59).  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, it is set up to  
display the first frame of each clip as the thumbnail. As  
required, you can select another frame to display as the  
thumbnail.  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
1 2 3 4  
5 6 7  
For example, if there are several seconds of color bars  
recorded at the start of the clip, selecting a frame several  
seconds after the end of the recording of color bars can  
make it easier to identify the clip.  
1 PREV button  
2 PLAY button  
3 NEXT button  
4 STOP button  
5 Jog dial  
6 Shuttle dial  
7 V/MARK1 button and v/MARK2 button  
The GUI screen allows you to select thumbnail frames  
while viewing the video.  
To start playback  
Press the PLAY button.  
Playback starts.  
When two or more clips are recorded on the disc, they are  
played back continuously.  
You can also use setup menu item 143 INDEX PICTURE  
POSITION to specify a different default frame. You can  
specify the initial frame in any of the first few seconds  
after the initial frame. The setting range is 0 seconds to 10  
seconds.  
Note  
No audio is output when non-audio signals are played  
back.  
Playback operation  
To jump to the next or previous clip, then start  
playback  
This section describes the following types of playback:  
Normal playback: Playback at normal speed  
Playback in jog mode: Variable-speed playback, with the  
speed determined by the speed of turning the jog dial  
Playback in shuttle mode: Variable-speed playback, with  
the speed determined by the angular position of the  
shuttle dial  
Playback in variable-speed mode: Variable-speed  
playback, with the speed finely determined by the  
angular position of the shuttle dial  
Use the PREV button, NEXT button, jog dial, or shuttle  
dial.  
To stop playback  
Press the STOP button.  
If you play back to the end of the last clip, playback  
automatically stops.  
If, in this state, you press the PLAY button, the message  
“Disc End!” appears on the display.  
To carry out playback again, move back to the desired clip  
using the PREV button, jog dial or shuttle dial.  
Normal playback  
First insert a disc.  
To set shot marks  
While playing back a disc, you can set essence marks such  
as Shot Mark1 and Shot Mark2 in desired frames.  
To set a Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2, hold down the V/  
MARK1 or v/MARK2 button and press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
For details of how to insert a disc, see “Loading and  
Use the PDZ-1Proxy Browsing Software on the supplied  
XDCAM Application Software CD-ROM to delete and  
modify essence marks.  
See page 126 for an overview of the PDZ-1 software and  
information about how to install it.  
48  
Playback  
             
You can also delete and modify essence marks from the  
Thumbnail Menu of the chapter thumbnail screen (see  
EJECT  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
OUT  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
MENU  
MARK2  
Playback in jog mode  
In jog mode, you can control the speed of playback by the  
speed of turning the jog dial. The playback speed range is  
–1 to +1 times normal speed.  
SHTL/JOG  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
RESET  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
To carry out playback in jog mode, proceed as follows.  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
3
1 2,3  
EJECT  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
1
2
Press the SHTL/JOG button, turning it on.  
IN  
OUT  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
MENU  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
RESET  
Turn the shuttle dial to the desired angle  
corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
Playback in shuttle mode starts.  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
3
To stop playback in shuttle mode, return the shuttle  
dial to the center position, or press the STOP button.  
1 2,3 1  
When setup menu item 101 SELECTION FOR  
SEARCH DIAL ENABLE is set to “dial” (factory  
default setting), you can start shuttle playback by  
simply rotating the shuttle dial, even when the SHTL/  
JOG button is not lit.  
1
2
Press the SHTL/JOG button or VAR/JOG button,  
turning it on.  
Turn the jog dial in the desired direction, at the speed  
corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
To alternate between normal-speed playback and  
shuttle mode playback  
Playback in jog mode starts.  
Set the shuttle dial to the position corresponding to the  
desired shuttle playback speed, then switch between  
normal-speed playback and shuttle playback by pressing  
the PLAY and SHTL/JOG buttons alternately.  
3
To stop playback in jog mode, stop turning the jog dial.  
When setup menu item 101 SELECTION FOR  
SEARCH DIAL ENABLE is set to “dial” (factory  
default setting), you can start jog playback by simply  
rotating the jog dial, even when the SHTL/JOG and  
VAR/JOG buttons are not lit.  
Playback in variable-speed mode  
In variable-speed mode, you can control the speed of  
playback in the range of –2 to +2 times normal speed. (You  
can use setup menu item 119 VARIABLE SPEED LIMIT  
IN KEY to specify the speed range of variable playback.)  
To carry out playback in variable-speed mode, proceed as  
follows.  
Playback in shuttle mode  
In shuttle mode, you can control the speed of playback by  
the angular position of the shuttle dial. The range of  
playback speed is 20 times normal speed.  
To carry out playback in shuttle mode, proceed as follows.  
EJECT  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
OUT  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
MENU  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
RESET  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
3
2,3 1  
49  
Playback  
           
1
2
Press the VAR/JOG button, turning it on.  
Turn the shuttle dial to the desired angle  
corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
Playback in variable-speed mode starts.  
3
To stop playback in variable-speed mode, return the  
shuttle dial to the center position, or press the STOP  
button.  
To alternate between normal-speed playback and  
variable-speed mode playback  
Set the shuttle dial to the position corresponding to the  
desired variable playback speed, then switch between  
normal-speed playback and variable-speed mode playback  
by pressing the PLAY and VAR/JOG buttons alternately.  
Playback operations using  
thumbnails  
Playback operations that you can perform with thumbnails  
include searching for clips, displaying clip information,  
playing clip lists created with the scene selection function,  
and locking and deleting clip. This allows you to check the  
actual video as you work.  
information about thumbnail operations, and “Scene  
information about the scene selection function.  
50  
Playback  
 
Operations in GUI  
Screens  
5
Chapter  
Overview  
You can perform scene searches, play the searched scenes,  
and select scenes (edit clip list) in Graphical User Interface  
(GUI) screens. The GUI screens are your gateways to discs  
and the data saved on discs.  
Switching between GUI screens  
The most important GUI screens are:  
Clip thumbnail screen: displays thumbnails of clips on  
the disc. “Clip” is displayed as the title at the upper  
left of the screen (see page 52).  
Clip list thumbnail screen: displays thumbnails of sub  
clips in a clip list. “Clip List” is displayed as the title  
at the upper left of the screen (see page 52).  
There are also two playback screens:  
Clip playback screen: playback screen for normal video  
Clip list playback screen: playback screen for clip list  
video  
You will use the THUMBNAIL button 1 and the SUB  
CLIP/DISC MENU button 2 to switch between these  
four screens. Each press of these buttons switches between  
the screens as shown in the following figure. The  
THUMBNAIL and SUB CLIP/DISC MENU indicators  
light as follows, according to the type of screen that is  
currently displayed.  
Note  
To switch between these four screens, a disc with recorded  
clips must be loaded in the unit.  
51  
Overview  
                           
a)  
Clip thumbnail screen  
Clip playback screen  
Clip:C0006  
006/040  
TC 00:25:06:14  
TC 00:27:51:09  
TC 00:23:54:22  
1
1
TC 00:23:00:25  
TC 00:25:49:23  
TC 00:28:06:09  
TC 00:23:40:07  
TC 00:26:22:10  
TC 00:28:22:02  
TC 00:24:45:11  
TC 00:27:19:04  
TC 00:23:34:18  
TCR 00 : 23 : 00 . 26  
JOG  
STILL  
001/036  
DATE&TIME 30 NOV 2005 13:38 DUR 0:00:10:23  
THUMBNAIL  
THUMBNAIL  
Unlit  
Unlit  
Lit  
1
2
1
2
SUB CLIP  
SUB CLIP  
Unlit  
DISC MENU  
DISC MENU  
2
2
2
2
a) b)  
b)  
Clip list playback screen  
Clip list thumbnail screen  
Clip List:E0001  
002/013  
TC 00:00:20:13  
TC 00:00:53:22  
TC 00:01:17:27  
1
1
TC 00:00:00:00  
TC 00:00:28:08  
TC 00:00:59:16  
TC 00:00:04:14  
TC 00:00:35:15  
TC 00:01:06:18  
TC 00:00:12:04  
TC 00:00:46:08  
TC 00:01:13:11  
TCR 00 : 00 : 18 . 01  
SHUTTLE STILL  
F0008 : 003/005  
DATE&TIME 28 JUL 2006 19:55  
TOTAL DUR 00:01:31:16  
THUMBNAIL  
THUMBNAIL  
Unlit  
Lit  
Lit  
1
2
1
2
SUB CLIP  
SUB CLIP  
Lit  
DISC MENU  
DISC MENU  
a) Playback screens appear when you switch to video monitor display. Use the DISPLAY button to switch from the basic monitor  
display to video monitor display (see page 15).  
b) The clip list playback screen appears when a clip list is loaded into the unit's memory (see page 70).  
The other thumbnail screens are:  
• Expand thumbnail screen  
1
2
1
3
4
• Chapter thumbnail screen  
• Essence mark thumbnail screen  
Clip:C0006  
TC 00:23:00:25  
TC 00:25:49:23  
TC 00:28:06:09  
006/040  
TC 00:25:06:14  
TC 00:27:51:09  
TC 00:23:54:22  
TC 00:23:40:07  
TC 00:26:22:10  
TC 00:28:22:02  
TC 00:24:45:11  
TC 00:27:19:04  
TC 00:23:34:18  
Information and controls in  
thumbnail screens  
Clip thumbnail screen  
DATE&TIME 30 NOV 2005 13:38 DUR 0:00:10:23  
This screen displays thumbnails of clips on the disc in the  
order that they were recorded. You can use this screen to  
work with clips – deleting or locking them, selecting their  
index pictures, adding them to clip lists, and so on.  
5
6
52  
Overview  
         
a Clip name  
been changed to any frame other than the first frame of a  
clip (see page 62).  
Displays the name of the selected clip. When the clip has a  
title, the title is displayed as “TITLE00001” (see page 77).  
When the unit's area of use (UC/J MODEL SELECT) (see  
page 25) is set to “UC”, clip names can be displayed in  
European languages.  
Note  
When you cue up a clip, the unit always cues up the first  
frame, even when the index picture has been changed to a  
different frame.  
Note  
To display the clip title, Settings >Display Title in the Disc  
Menu needs to be set to On.  
c S mark  
This mark appears when shot marks or multiple Rec Start  
essence marks have been set in the clip (see page 45).  
The chapter thumbnail screen can be displayed for clips  
that show this mark (see page 54).  
b Selection frame  
Indicates that the thumbnail is selected. To select another  
thumbnail, move the frame (see page 58). Multiple  
selection frames appear when multiple thumbnails are  
d Clip and frame information  
Displays the clip or frame information selected with the  
Clip Information item in the Thumbnail Menu (see  
page 61). The factory default selection is the timecode of  
the first frame or the timecode of the thumbnail frame.  
c Clip number/total number of clips  
Displays the total number of clips on the disc, and the  
number of the selected clip.  
e Lock icon  
d Scrollbar  
This icon appears when the clip is locked (protected) (see  
page 63). Clips cannot be deleted and their clip  
information cannot be changed when this mark is  
displayed.  
When not all of the thumbnails can be displayed in the  
thumbnail display area, the position of the slider shows the  
relative position of the currently displayed clips, and the  
length of the slider shows the relative length of currently  
displayed clips within all of the clips.  
When you have a large number of thumbnails, you can  
save time by using the Skip Scroll function to jump  
directly to the thumbnail you want (see page 59).  
Clip list thumbnail screen  
This screen displays thumbnails of the clips in the current  
clip list. You can use this screen to create and edit clips  
lists.  
e Clip date and time  
Displays the date and time when the selected clip was shot  
1
2
3
4
and recorded.  
Clip List:E0001  
002/013  
TC 00:00:20:13  
TC 00:00:53:22  
f Duration  
Displays the duration (recording time) of the selected clip.  
TC 00:00:00:00  
TC 00:00:28:08  
TC 00:00:59:16  
TC 00:00:04:14  
TC 00:00:12:04  
TC 00:00:46:08  
TC 00:01:13:11  
A Thumbnail display items  
TC 00:00:35:15  
TC 00:01:06:18  
1
2
3
TC 00:01:17:27  
DATE&TIME 28 JUL 2006 19:55  
TOTAL DUR 00:01:31:16  
TC 00:26:22:10  
5
6
a Clip list name  
4
5
Displays the name of the clip list. When the clip list has a  
title, it is displayed as “TITLE00001” (see page 77).  
When the unit's area of use (UC/J MODEL SELECT) (see  
page 25) is set to “UC”, clip names can be displayed in  
European languages.  
a Index picture  
Displays an image to stand for the content of the clip. The  
index picture is normally the first frame of the clip.  
b Index picture changed mark  
This mark, like the folded-over corner of a page that you  
want to remember, appears when the index picture has  
53  
Overview  
           
b Clip number/total clips × number of divisions  
Displays the number of the selected clip, the total number  
of clips on the disc, and the number of times that the  
selected clip has been divided to display the expansion  
thumbnails.  
Note  
To display the clip title, Settings >Display Title in the Disc  
Menu needs to be set to On.  
b Selection frame  
c Thumbnail number/total thumbnails  
Displays the total number of expanded thumbnails and the  
number of the selected thumbnail.  
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 52).  
c Sub clip number/number of sub clips  
Displays the total number of sub clips in the clip list, and  
the number of the selected sub clip.  
d Scrollbar  
d Scrollbar  
e Clip name  
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 52).  
Displays the name of the expanded clip. When the clip has  
a title, it is displayed as “TITLE00001” (see page 77).  
When the unit's area of use (UC/J MODEL SELECT) (see  
page 25) is set to “UC”, clip names can be displayed in  
European languages.  
e Clip list date and time  
Displays the date and time when the clip list was created,  
or the date and time of its most recent modification. An  
asterisk (*) appears after the date and time of creation  
when the current clip list has not been saved to the disc.  
Note  
To display the clip title, Settings >Display Title in the Disc  
Menu needs to be set to On.  
Note  
“New File” appears when no clip list has been loaded into  
the unit's memory, and when a clip list has been cleared  
from the unit's memory.  
f Duration  
Displays the time from the selected thumbnail to the next  
one.  
f Total duration  
Displays the total duration of all sub clips in the clip list.  
Chapter thumbnail screen  
The sections between shot mark and Rec Start essence  
marks in clips are called chapters. This screen allows you  
to display thumbnails of the chapters in the selected clip.  
Expand thumbnail screen  
This screen displays thumbnails of equally sized divisions  
of the selected clip.  
Note  
1
2
3
4
Shot marks can be set during recording and playback. They  
can be deleted and moved.  
Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at the start of  
recording. They cannot be deleted or moved.  
Expand Clip 008/024 x 12  
001/012  
TC 00:01:36:27  
TC 00:01:38:22  
TC 00:01:40:16  
TC 00:01:35:17  
TC 00:01:37:11  
TC 00:01:39:06  
TC 00:01:38:00  
TC 00:01:37:24  
TC 00:01:38:19  
TC 00:01:36:14  
TC 00:01:38:08  
TC 00:01:40:02  
1
2
3
4
5
Chapter of Clip 001/024  
001/003  
TC 00:23:00:25  
TC 00:23:02:00  
TC 00:23:04:00  
CLIP Tene  
DUR 0:00:00:13  
5
6
a Selection frame  
CLIP C0001  
DUR 0:00:01:05  
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 52).  
6
7
54  
Overview  
         
a Selection frame  
1
2
3
4
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 52).  
Shot Mark1  
TC 00:23:02:00  
TC 00:26:22:11  
TC 00:28:35:00  
001/029  
TC 00:25:40:24  
TC 00:28:06:17  
TC 00:29:20:03  
b Clip number/total clips  
Displays the total number of clips on the disc and the  
number of the clip that contains the displayed chapters.  
TC 00:24:45:25  
TC 00:27:19:25  
TC 00:28:55:02  
TC 00:25:07:01  
TC 00:27:51:25  
TC 00:29:10:05  
c S1/S2/RS marks  
The “S1”, “S2”, and “RS” marks on the thumbnails  
indicate frames where Shot Mark1, Shot Mark2, and Rec  
Start essence marks are set.  
30 NOV 2006 19:55  
"Capping literally years of spe..."  
d Chapter number/total chapters  
Displays the total number of chapters and the number of  
the selected chapter.  
5
6
a Essence mark name  
Displays the name of the essence mark (Shot Mark1 here).  
Note  
The total number of chapters is the total number of  
chapters in the specified clip only.  
b Selection frame  
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 52).  
e Scrollbar  
c Essence mark number/total essence marks  
Displays the total number of essence marks and the  
number of the selected essence mark.  
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 52).  
f Clip name  
Displays the name of the clip whose chapter is displayed.  
When the clip has a title, it is displayed as “TITLE00001”  
(see page 77). When the unit's area of use (UC/J MODEL  
SELECT) (see page 25) is set to “UC”, clip names can be  
displayed in European languages.  
Note  
The total number of essence marks is the total number of  
essence marks that have been set in all clips on the disc.  
d Scrollbar  
Note  
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 52).  
To display the clip title, Settings >Display Title in the Disc  
Menu needs to be set to On.  
e Clip date and time  
Displays the date and time when the clip that contains the  
selected thumbnail was recorded or last modified.  
g Duration  
Displays the time from the first frame of the selected  
chapter to the first frame of the next chapter.  
f Clip name  
Displays the name of the clip that contains the selected  
frame. When the clip has a title, it is displayed as  
“TITLE00001” (see page 77). When the unit's area of use  
(UC/J MODEL SELECT) (see page 25) is set to “UC”,  
clip names can be displayed in European languages.  
Essence mark thumbnail screen  
This screen displays thumbnails of the specified essence  
mark, found by searching all clips on the disc.  
Note  
To display the clip title, Settings >Display Title in the Disc  
Menu needs to be set to On.  
55  
Overview  
 
Clip thumbnail screen  
Displaying menus  
Clip:"Navigeting sibiling relati..."  
018/036  
TC 00:30:25:11  
TC 00:24:24:29  
TC 00:25:49:07  
Thumbnail Menu  
The Thumbnail Menu displays menu items that are valid  
for the currently displayed thumbnail screen.  
TC 00:29:19:23  
TC 00:30:40:13  
TC 00:24:34:27  
TC 00:29:38:25  
TC 01:01:28:25  
TC 00:24:46:22  
TC 00:29:50:04  
TC 00:09:43:14  
TC 00:25:42:08  
To display the Thumbnail Menu  
To display the Thumbnail Menu, press the MENU button  
with a thumbnail screen displayed. To return to the original  
screen, press the MENU button again, or press the RESET/  
RETURN button.  
DATE&TIME 30 NOV 2005 14:14 DUR 0:23:22:26  
1
1 or 2  
1
2
Thumbnail Menu  
Clip Information  
EJECT  
Skip Scroll  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
Select Index Picture  
Clip Properties  
Add Sub Clips  
Delete Clip  
Lock/Unlock Clip  
Thumbnail Search  
Thumbnail View  
IN  
OUT  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
MENU  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
SHIFT+SET  
SHIFT+RESET  
SHIFT+STOP  
CH-2  
RESET  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
Thumbnail Menu of the clip thumbnail screen  
1 MENU button  
2 RESET/RETURN button  
Shortcut operations  
Shortcut button names are displayed next to the menu  
items of commands that have shortcuts (see page 73).  
Note  
Shortcuts displayed within parentheses should be used  
with all menus closed.  
Thumbnail Menu submenus  
• The Thumbnail Search Menu contains the basic  
commands for thumbnail searches.  
• The Thumbnail View Menu contains the basic  
commands for moving to other menus.  
Disc Menu  
The Disc Menu allows you to do the following.  
Item  
Operation/Setting  
Load Clip List  
Save Clip List  
Save Clip List As…  
Delete Clip List  
Clear Clip List  
Load clip list into this unit's memory.  
Save a clip list under its current name, overwriting the old contents.  
Save a clip list under a new name.  
Delete a clip list.  
Clear the current clip list from the unit's memory.  
Lock or Delete All Clips  
Sub-Item  
Lock All Clips  
Unlock All Clips  
Delete All Clips  
Lock all clips.  
Unlock all clips.  
Delete all clips.  
56  
Overview  
       
Item  
Operation/Setting  
Disc Properties  
Format Disc  
Settings  
Display the properties of the currently loaded disc.  
Format the currently loaded disc.  
Sub-Item  
SET Key on Thumbnail  
Selects the behavior of the unit when the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob is  
pressed with one thumbnail selected.  
Cue up & Still: Cue up the selected thumbnail.  
Cue up & Play: Cue up and play the selected thumbnail.  
Sort Clip List By…  
Display Title  
Selects a method to sort the clip list.  
NAME (A-Z): Sort in ascending alphabetic order.  
DATE (Newest First): Sort by date and time of creation, newest clip  
first.  
Selects whether to display clip and clip list titles.  
On: Display the title, if it has been set. Otherwise display the clip  
name or clip list name.  
Off: Do not display the title. Always display the clip name or clip list  
name.  
To display the Disc Menu  
Clip list thumbnail screen  
To display the Disc Menu, press the SUB CLIP/DISC  
MENU button with the SHIFT button held down in one of  
the following screens.  
• Clip thumbnail screen  
• Clip list thumbnail screen  
Clip List:E0001  
002/013  
TC 00:00:20:13  
TC 00:00:53:22  
TC 00:01:17:27  
TC 00:00:00:00  
TC 00:00:28:08  
TC 00:00:59:16  
TC 00:00:04:14  
TC 00:00:12:04  
TC 00:00:46:08  
TC 00:01:13:11  
• Clip playback screen  
• Clip list playback screen  
TC 00:00:35:15  
To return to the original screen, press the RESET/  
RETURN button.  
TC 00:01:06:18  
DATE&TIME 28 JUL 2006 19:55  
TOTAL DUR 00:01:31:16  
Note  
1+2  
3
The Disc Menu is not displayed when the disc is not loaded  
into this unit.  
Disc Menu  
Load Clip List  
Save Clip List  
Save Clip List As...  
Delete Clip List  
Clear Clip List  
Lock or Delete All Clips  
Disc Properties  
Format Disc  
3
EJECT  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
OUT  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
MENU  
MARK2  
Settings  
SHTL/JOG  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
RESET  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
1
2
1 SHIFT button  
2 SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button  
3 RESET/RETURN button  
57  
Overview  
   
To increment and decrement numbers  
Do one of the following.  
GUI screen operations  
• Press the V/MARK1 or v/MARK2 button.  
• Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
• Turn the jog dial.  
1
2
3
EJECT  
To confirm selections  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
OUT  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
MENU  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
RESET  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
6
5
4
1 PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob  
2 B/IN, b/OUT button  
3 V/MARK1, v/MARK2 button  
4 Jog and shuttle dials  
5 RESET/RETURN button  
6 SHIFT button  
To select items  
Do one of the following to select thumbnails, menu items,  
timecode digits, and other items.  
• Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
• Turn the jog or shuttle dial.  
• Press the V/MARK1, v/MARK2, B/IN or b/OUT  
button.  
• Press the PREV or NEXT button.  
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the PREV or  
NEXT button (to move to the first or last item).  
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the V/MARK1  
or v/MARK2 button (to move to the previous or next  
page).  
To select multiple thumbnails  
Do one of the following  
• Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob with the SHIFT  
button held down.  
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the B/IN or b/  
OUT button.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
To move from a menu level to the next  
lower or higher menu level  
For a menu item displayed together with b or B, you can  
move to the next lower or higher menu level by pressing  
the B/IN or b/OUT button.  
58  
Overview  
         
4
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob at the new position.  
Thumbnail Operations  
The thumbnail at the position indicated in the small  
popup window appears in a thumbnail screen like the  
1)  
following .  
You can use thumbnail screens to display clip information  
and to find, protect, and delete clips. The thumbnails  
provide visual confirmation of these and other operations.  
Expand  
007/235  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
Selecting thumbnails  
The thumbnail selection frame (see page 53) indicates the  
currently selected thumbnail.  
CLIP "Seashore"  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
To move the thumbnail selection frame  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
1) Expand thumbnail screen  
To skip quickly through thumbnails (Skip  
Scroll function)  
When you have a large number of thumbnails, like in  
expand thumbnail screen, you can use the Skip Scroll  
function to skip through them quickly.  
To select multiple thumbnails  
Move the selection frame to the first thumbnail that you  
want to select. Then, with the SHIFT button held down,  
turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
To cancel the multiple selection, move the selection frame  
without the SHIFT button held down.  
See page 58 for more information about operations in  
thumbnail screens.  
Clip:"Navigeting sibiling relati..."  
018/036  
TC 00:30:25:11  
TC 00:24:24:29  
TC 00:25:49:07  
1
2
In the screens like clip thumbnail screen or expand  
thumbnail screen, display the Thumbnail Menu.  
TC 00:29:19:23  
TC 00:30:40:13  
TC 00:24:34:27  
TC 00:29:38:25  
TC 01:01:28:25  
TC 00:24:46:22  
TC 00:29:50:04  
TC 00:09:43:14  
TC 00:25:42:08  
Select Skip Scroll, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
A small popup window appears on the scrollbar to  
indicate the position of the currently selected  
thumbnail within the set of all thumbnails.  
DATE&TIME 30 NOV 2005 14:14 DUR 0:23:22:26  
Expand  
007/235  
Searching with thumbnails  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
By using the thumbnails that appear in the various  
thumbnail screens, you can easily cue up and play clips  
and sub clips.  
Skip Scroll  
007/235  
Using thumbnails to find clips  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
CLIP "Seashore"  
DUR 0:00:00:01  
The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails of all clips  
recorded on the disc. You can use this screen to cue up the  
selected clip and to carry out playback (see page 61).  
3
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
1
information.  
The current position moves by an amount equal to /  
of the total number of thumbnails.  
10  
When you reach a point that is close to the thumbnail  
you want, turn the jog dial to move the selection frame  
in units of 1 thumbnail.  
Using the expand function to find scenes  
The expand function allows you to divide a selected clip  
into equally sized blocks, and to display thumbnails of the  
59  
Thumbnail Operations  
                                 
first frame in each block. This is a quick and efficient way  
to review the selected clip and search for target scenes.  
You can specify 12, 144, or 1728 divisions.  
See “To set shot marks” (page 45) for more information.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of a  
clip with chapters set.  
The “S” mark appears on the thumbnails of clips with  
chapters set.  
Note  
2
Press the CHAPTER button.  
The maximum number of blocks may be smaller than 1728  
when the recorded duration of the clip is short. In this case,  
the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is fixed at 1  
frame. This allows you to view expanded thumbnails at  
equal intervals.  
The chapter thumbnail screen (see page 54) appears,  
with thumbnails of the frames where chapters are set.  
The “S1”, “S2”, and “RS” marks on the thumbnails  
indicate frames where Shot Mark1, Shot Mark2, and  
Rec Start essence marks are set.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
To delete the shot mark at a chapter position  
You can delete the shot mark (Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2)  
at the chapter position in the chapter thumbnail screen.  
(Rec Satrt cannot be deleted.).  
1
2
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of  
the clip that contains the scene you want to find.  
1
In the chapter thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail  
for the frame whose shot mark you want to delete.  
Press the EXPAND button.  
The selected clip is divided into 12 blocks, and a list  
appears in the expand thumbnail screen (see page 54)  
with the first frame of each block displayed as a  
thumbnail.  
2
3
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
Select Delete Shot Mark.  
A message appears asking if you are sure that you want  
to delete the shot mark.  
3
4
Select the thumbnail that you want to expand further.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 up to 2 times, as required.  
Note  
Delete Shot Mark  
Thumbnails cannot be further expanded when they already  
have the minimum duration (1 frame).  
Delete 002?  
OK  
Cancel  
To return to the previous expansion level  
Press the EXPAND button with the SHIFT button held  
down.  
To display the expand thumbnail screen of the  
previous or next clip  
With the expand thumbnail screen still active, press the  
PREV button or the NEXT button.  
4
Select OK to delete the mark, or Cancel to cancel the  
deletion, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
To adjust the position of shot marks at chapter  
positions  
You can use the chapter thumbnail screen to adjust the  
position of shot marks (Shot Mark1 and Shot Mark2) at  
chapter positions. (The positions of Rec Start essence  
marks cannot be adjusted.)  
Using the chapter function to find scenes  
Sections between shot marks and Rec Start are called  
chapters.  
Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at the start of  
recording, but shot marks can be set at any scene during  
recording or playback.  
The chapter function allows you to display thumbnails of  
the chapters in a clip.  
1
In the chapter thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail  
of the shot mark whose position you want to adjust.  
60  
Thumbnail Operations  
         
2
3
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
The essence mark thumbnail screen displays a list of  
frames where the selected essence mark is set.  
Select Move Shot Mark.  
The Move Shot Mark screen is displayed.  
Playing the scene you have found  
0002/0002  
Move Shot Mark : ShotMark2  
After finding a clip with one of the methods explained in  
the previous section, “Searching with thumbnails” (see  
page 59), you can cue up and play the clip that you have  
found.  
• Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to cue up the position  
of the selected thumbnail.  
• The PLAY button starts playback from the selected  
frame.  
TCR 00:28:23:14  
OK  
Cancel  
To play clips with the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob  
In the Disc Menu, set Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail to  
“Cue up & Play”. Playback begins from the selected frame  
when you press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob, in the same  
way as when you press the PLAY button.  
You can perform playback and searches in this screen.  
4
5
Use the PLAY button or jog dial to display the frame  
you want.  
Select OK, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
Selecting the information displayed  
on thumbnails  
To display the chapter thumbnail screen of the  
previous or next clip with chapters  
With the chapter thumbnail screen still active, press the  
PREV button or the NEXT button.  
The unit searches in the reverse or forward direction for the  
next clip with chapters, beginning with the previous or  
next clip.  
You can select the information to be displayed at the  
bottom of the thumbnails in thumbnail screens.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
1
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail  
screen.  
Using essence marks to find scenes  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
Select Clip Information.  
A window appears in which you can select the  
information to display.  
1
In the clip playback screen or the clip thumbnail  
screen, press the THUMBNAIL button with the  
SHIFT button held down.  
Thumbnail Menu  
The Select Essence Mark screen appears.  
The names of essence marks that are not recorded on  
the disc are displayed in gray.  
Clip Information  
Return to Upper Menu  
Date  
Time Code  
Duration  
Sequence Number  
Select Essence Mark  
Shot Mark1  
Shot Mark2  
Rec Start  
Cut  
Others  
3
Select the items that you want to display.  
Date: Date and time of creation, or date and time of the  
more recent modification  
Time Code: Timecode of first frame  
Duration: Playback time  
Sequence Number: Thumbnail sequence number  
2
Select the essence mark that you want, and then press  
the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
61  
Thumbnail Operations  
                 
Return to Upper Menu: Returns to the Thumbnail  
The following example explains how to do so from the  
expand thumbnail screen.  
Menu  
The selected information will appear at the bottom of  
the thumbnails when you display a thumbnail screen.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
1
In the expand thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail  
to set as the index picture.  
Changing clip index pictures  
2
3
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
Select Set Index Picture.  
The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails as index  
pictures for clips. Normally the index picture is the first  
frame in a clip, but you can set any frame in the clip as the  
index picture.  
A message appears asking you to confirm that you  
want to set the current frame as the index picture.  
Note  
You can only change index pictures from the clip  
thumbnail screen. The thumbnails shown in the clip list  
thumbnail screen, the expand thumbnail screen, and the  
chapter thumbnail screen cannot be changed.  
Set Index Picture  
OK  
TC 00:01:38:00  
Cancel  
To select a clip index picture while viewing the  
video  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of  
the clip whose index picture you want to change.  
4
Select OK, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
2
3
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
After pressing the RESET/RETURN button to return  
to the clip thumbnail screen, check to make sure that  
the newly selected frame is displayed as the index  
picture.  
Select Select Index Picture.  
Select Index screen appears.  
018/036  
Select Index:"Navigationg sibling relati..."  
Checking clip properties  
You can check clip properties such as the title, timecode,  
duration, date and time of creation, and date and time of  
the more recent modification.  
OK  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
TCR 01:09:16:13  
Cancel  
1
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail  
screen.  
You can play and search with this screen.  
4
5
Select a frame with the PLAY button or the jog dial.  
Select Clip Properties.  
Select OK, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
The Clip Properties screen appears.  
To select index pictures by using the expand and  
chapter functions  
After using the expand function (see page 59) or chapter  
function (see page 60) to find a frame, you can set that  
frame as the index picture of the clip.  
62  
Thumbnail Operations  
               
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnails of  
the clips that you want to lock.  
Clip Properties  
OK  
Clip No.  
Name  
Title  
Title2  
TC  
DUR  
Created  
Modified  
001/035  
TèlèvisionLCD  
Capping Literally years of specu...  
Rétroprpjecteurs BRAVIA  
00:23:00:25  
0:00:09:22  
30 NOV 2005 13:35 00:00  
20 MAY 2006 15:02 00:00  
2
3
4
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
Select Lock/Unlock Clip.  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Rec Device PDW-F70(SN-03042)  
A lock icon (see page 53) appears on the thumbnail of  
the locked clips.  
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut operation by  
pressing the STOP button with the SHIFT button held  
down.  
Clip No.: Clip number/total number of clips  
Name: Clip name  
1)  
Title: Title  
Title2: Title 2  
1)  
To lock all clips  
TC: Timecode of first frame  
DUR: Recording time  
1
2
Display the Disc Menu.  
Created: Date and time of creation  
Modified: Date and time of most recent modification  
Rec Device: Name of device that created clip (product  
number)  
Select “Lock or Delete All Clips”, and then select  
“Lock All Clips”.  
A message appears asking you to confirm locking all  
clips.  
1) When the unit’s area of use (UC/J MODEL SELECT) (see page 25)  
is set to “UC”, titles can be displayed in European languages.  
3
Select OK to lock all clips or Cancel to cancel it, and  
then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
To display the properties of the previous or the  
next clip  
Press the PREV button or the NEXT button.  
To unlock a specific clip  
To return to the clip thumbnail screen  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
Locking (write-protecting) clips  
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of  
the clip that you want to unlock.  
In a clip thumbnail screen, you can lock the selected clips  
so that they cannot be deleted or altered.  
Locking prevents the following operations on clips.  
• Deletion  
• Changing the index picture  
• Adding and deleting shot marks  
2
3
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
Select Lock/Unlock Clip.  
A message appears asking you to confirm the  
unlocking.  
Notes  
• Locked clips are deleted along with other clips when a  
disc is formatted.  
• Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the write  
inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled  
position, or when REC INH in the HOME page of the  
function menu is set to ON.  
Unlock Clip  
C0004  
Unlock this Clip?  
OK  
Cancel  
To lock clips  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
4
Select OK, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
63  
Thumbnail Operations  
           
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut operation by  
pressing the STOP button with the SHIFT button held  
down.  
Delete Clip & Clip List  
022/036  
INDEX  
MIDDLE1  
MIDDLE2  
END  
To unlock all clips  
TC 00:25:29:09  
TC 00:25:30:00  
TC 00:25:30:22  
TC 00:25:31:13  
1
2
Display the Disc Menu.  
Name C0023  
Title SCENE-00126  
Date 2005 DEC 01 14:55  
OK  
Select “Lock or Delete All Clips”, and then select  
“Unlock All Clips”.  
Dur  
0:00:02:05  
On Clip List  
Cancel  
A message appears asking you to confirm that you  
want to unlock all clips.  
4
Select OK, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
3
Select OK to execute the unlock, or Cancel to cancel  
it, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The selected clip is deleted, and you return to the clip  
thumbnail screen.  
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut operation by  
pressing the RESET/RETURN button with the SHIFT  
button held down.  
Deleting clips  
You can delete clips while checking their contents.  
To delete all clips  
Notes  
1
2
Display the Disc Menu.  
• Clips cannot be deleted when the write inhibit tab of the  
disc is set to the recording disabled position, or when  
REC INH in HOME page of the function menu is set to  
ON.  
Select “Lock or Delete All Clips”, and then select  
“Delete All Clips”.  
• Locked clips cannot be deleted.  
A message appears asking you to confirm that you  
want to delete all clips.  
• If a deletion target clips is referenced by clip lists on the  
disc, all of those clip lists are deleted as well.  
• If a deletion target clip is referenced in the current clip  
list, only those referencing sub clips are deleted at the  
same time as the deletion target clip.  
3
Select OK to execute the deletion, or Cancel to cancel  
it, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Note  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
Locked clips cannot be deleted.  
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of  
the clip that you want to delete.  
2
3
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
Select Delete Clip.  
A window appears asking you to confirm the deletion.  
The window displays thumbnails of four frames from  
the target clip (the first frame, two intermediate  
frames, and the last frame), along with the name, title,  
date of creation, and duration of the clip.  
One of the following messages also appears,  
depending on whether the clip is referenced in a clip  
list.  
When the clip is not referenced in a clip list:  
“Delete Clip”  
When the clip is referenced in a clip list: “Delete  
Clip & Clip List” (All clip lists that reference the  
target clip are deleted along with the clip.)  
64  
Thumbnail Operations  
       
Sub clips (clips in clip lists)  
Clips (or parts of clips) that have been added to a clip list  
are called “sub clips”. Sub clips are virtual editing data that  
specify ranges in the original clips. You can use them  
without modifying the original data.  
Scene Selection (Clip List  
Editing)  
The following figure illustrates the relation between clips  
and sub clips.  
What is scene selection?  
Clips on disc  
Scene selection is a function which allows you to select  
material (clips) from the material recorded on a disc and  
perform cut editing. You can do this by operating on this  
unit only.  
Clip 1  
Clip 3  
(C0003)  
Clip 4  
(C0004)  
Clip 2 (C0002)  
(C0001)  
• Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut  
editing in the field and in other offline situations.  
• In scene selection you create a clip list (editing data).  
Since the material itself is not affected, you can repeat  
this any number of times.  
Clip list (E0001)  
Sub clip 1  
Sub clip 2  
Sub clip 3  
• You can play back the edit list created by scene selection  
on this unit.  
• In scene selection you can add whole clips or add parts  
of a clip. You can add scenes using chapters, change the  
playback sequence, and amend or delete In and Out  
points. All of these operations can be carried out easily  
on this unit.  
• Clip lists (editing data) created with the scene selection  
function can be used on XPRI and other full-feature  
nonlinear editing systems.  
In the above example, the whole of clip 2 has been added  
as sub clip 1, and the whole of clip 4 has been added as sub  
clip 2.  
Sub clip 3 is part of clip 3. Therefore, when clip list E0001  
is played back, clip 4 is played after clip 2, and then the  
part of clip 3 shown in gray color is played.  
Clip list editing (current clip list)  
To edit a clip list, you need to load the clip list from the  
disc into the unit’s internal memory.  
The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory  
is called the “current clip list”.  
The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation  
and editing. Clip list playback also uses the current clip  
list.  
Clips  
Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called  
clips. A clip contains the material from a recording start  
point to a recording end point.  
Clips have numbers beginning with C, for example C0001.  
After creating and editing a clip list, you need to save it to  
disc.  
Recording  
start point of Recording end  
clip 2  
point of clip 2  
Unit memory  
Current clip list  
Can be edited (adding, deleting, and  
reordering sub clips)  
t Clip list playback  
and thumbnail  
display  
Clip 1  
(C0001)  
Clip 2  
(C0002)  
Clip 3  
(C0003)  
Clip 4  
(C0004)  
SAVE Mm LOAD  
Disc  
You can also assign titles to your clips and use the titles to  
manage them, instead of the clip numbers. For more  
C0001 (Clip 1)  
C0002 (Clip 2)  
C0003 (Clip 3)  
E0001 (Clip list 1)  
E0002 (Clip list 2)  
E0003 (Clip list 3)  
E0099 (Clip list 99)  
Clip lists  
You can use the scene selection function to select clips  
from the clips saved on a disc and create a cut edit list  
called a “clip list”.  
Clip lists have numbers beginning with E, for example  
E0001. Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc.  
Clip list playback  
Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc.  
65  
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)  
                           
To play a clip list, insert a disc into the unit, load the clip  
list that you want to play, and press the PLAY button.  
Clips are played according to the data in the clip list.  
To add sub clips  
You can add sub clips to clip lists from with the clip  
thumbnail screen or the clip list thumbnail screen.  
However, you must use the clip list thumbnail screen to  
edit clip lists.  
Creating and editing clip lists  
Adding sub clips from the clip thumbnail screen  
The following procedure explains operations in the clip  
thumbnail screen. You can proceed in the same way in the  
expand thumbnail screen and the chapter thumbnail  
screen. Expanded blocks are added as sub clips in the  
expand thumbnail screen, and chapters are added as sub  
clips in the chapter thumbnail screen.  
The following table lists the steps in the creation and  
editing of clip lists with the scene selection function. To  
create a clip list, you always need to carry out the steps  
inside the heavy lines. Other steps can be carried out as  
required.  
1
Add sub clips: Use the Add Sub Clips command to add  
the clips you want to use to a clip list. You can add  
up to 300 sub clips to one clip list.  
This operation can be carried out in the following  
thumbnail screens.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the clip that you  
want to add as a sub clip (multiple selections possible).  
• Clip thumbnail screen  
• Expand thumbnail screen  
• Chapter thumbnail screen  
• Clip list thumbnail screen  
2
3
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
2
Change the sub clip order: Use the Move Sub Clips  
command to change the order of sub clips in a clip  
list.  
Delete sub clips: Use the Delete Sub Clips command  
to delete specified sub clips from a clip list.  
Trim sub clips: Use the Trim Sub Clip command to  
adjust the In and Out points of a sub clip. This  
function can also be used to adjust the overall  
duration of the clip list.  
Select Add Sub Clips, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The Add Sub Clip screen appears.  
The clip(s) selected in step 1 appear in the upper part  
of this screen, and the clip list appears in the lower  
Scene Selection window. The I cursor in the Scene  
Selection window indicates the location where the  
currently selected sub clip(s) will be inserted.  
Set the start timecode: Use the Set Start Time Code  
command to set the timecode at the start of a clip  
list.  
3
4
Play the clip list: Use the PLAY button and other  
playback controls to play the current clip list and  
check its contents.  
Add Sub Clip  
002  
017/035  
Save the clip list: Use the Save Clip List or Save Clip  
List As… command to save the newly created clip  
list to the disc.  
TC 00:30:25:11  
TC 00:30:40:13  
TC 00:24:34:27  
TC 01:01:28:25  
TC 00:09:43:14  
TC 00:24:24:29  
TC 00:24:46:22  
TC 00:24:56:24  
To reedit clip lists on the disc  
TOTAL  
00:13:48:24  
Scene Selection  
Use the Load Clip List command to load the clip lists you  
want to edit, and perform the steps 2 to 4 in the previous  
section.  
You can also delete clip lists on the disc.  
To display the total duration after addition of the  
selected clip  
Press the SHIFT button.  
Note  
4
5
In the Scene Selection window, move the I cursor to  
the location where you want to insert the clip. (The  
existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and  
right of the I cursor.)  
Clip lists can be created and edited even when the write  
inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording disabled, and when  
REC INH on the HOME page of the function menu is set  
to ON. However, if you need to save the clip list, set write  
inhibit tab and REC INH to enable recording before you  
create or edit the clip list.  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The selected clip is inserted as a sub clip and a “+”  
mark appears on the thumbnail in the Scene Selection  
window.  
66  
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)  
         
To check the addition results  
Move the cursor.  
the location where the currently selected sub clips will  
be inserted.  
6
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
To display the total duration after addition of the  
selected clips  
Press the SHIFT button.  
This returns you to the Clip thumbnail screen.  
7
8
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips.  
5
6
In the Scene Selection window, move the I cursor to  
the location where you want to insert the clip. (The  
existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and  
right of the I cursor.)  
Save the clip list (see page 69).  
In step 1, you can hold down the SHIFT button when you  
press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob. This is a shortcut that  
displays the Add Sub Clip screen immediately. You can  
also save the clip list immediately in step 5 by executing  
the Save Clip List command in the Disc Menu.  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The sub clips are added at the I cursor position, and  
you return to the clip list thumbnail screen.  
You can check the results of the addition in that screen.  
Adding sub clips from the clip list thumbnail  
screen  
7
8
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
Save the clip list (see page 69).  
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut operation by  
pressing the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob with the SHIFT  
button held down.  
1
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
Select Add Sub Clips, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
To add clips from the clip playback screen (quick  
insertion)  
This method allows you to decide the range to use and add  
that range as a sub clip while viewing the video in the clip  
playback screen. It does not use GUI screens. You can do  
this during recording, playback (including pauses), and  
searches.  
The Clip List (Add) screen appears.  
Clip List (Add)  
002  
017/035  
TC 00:30:25:11  
TC 00:30:40:13  
TC 01:01:28:25  
TC 00:09:43:14  
1
Find the point that you want to make the start point of  
the sub clip, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob with the B/IN button held down.  
TC 00:24:24:29  
TC 00:24:34:27  
TC 00:24:46:22  
TC 00:24:56:24  
TOTAL  
00:13:48:24  
Scene Selection  
An In point is set and the IN indicator lights.  
2
Find the point that you want to make the end point of  
the sub clip, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob with the b/OUT button held down.  
3
4
Select the sub clips that you want to add from the  
upper part of the screen (the part where 8 thumbnails  
are displayed, multiple selections possible).  
An Out point is set and the OUT indicator lights. (This  
determines the range of the sub clip to be added.)  
To select from expanded thumbnails  
Press the EXPAND button to display the expand  
thumbnail screen.  
To check the timecode of the In point or Out point  
Press the B/IN button or the b/OUT button.  
To select from chapter thumbnails  
Press the CHAPTER button to display the chapter  
thumbnail screen.  
To cue up the In point or Out point  
Press the PREV button or the NEXT button with the  
B/IN button or b/OUT button held down.  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
To check the duration (time from In point to Out  
point)  
Press the B/IN and b/OUT buttons at the same time.  
The thumbnail selection is confirmed, and an I cursor  
appears at the bottom of the Clip List (Add) screen (in  
the Scene Selection window). The I cursor indicates  
67  
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)  
 
To delete the In point or Out point  
Press the RESET/RETURN button with the B/IN or  
b/OUT button held down.  
7
Save the clip list (see page 69).  
To adjust the In and Out points of sub clips  
(trim)  
Proceed as follows to define the range of a scene by  
changing the positions of the In and Out points.  
3
With the SHIFT button held down, press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
A sub clip with the range specified in steps 1 and 2 is  
added to the end of the clip list.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
When you specify a range that spans several clips  
Sub clips are generated for each of the clips in the  
range.  
1
2
3
In the clip list thumbnail screen, select a thumbnail.  
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
To check the newly added sub clips  
You can check the newly added sub clips by  
displaying the clip list thumbnail screen.  
Select Trim Sub Clip, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
4
5
Repeat steps 1 to 3 as required to add more sub clips.  
The Clip List (Trim) screen appears.  
Save the clip list (see page 69).  
001/034  
Clip List (Trim)  
Total 00:13:48:24  
DUR 00:00:21:27  
To reorder sub clips  
IN  
01:17:33:08  
OUT  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
01:17:55:05  
OK  
TCR 01:17:33:08  
019/035  
CLIP  
Cancel  
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, select the thumbnails  
of the sub clips that you want to move (multiple  
selections possible).  
Like the clip playback screen, this screen allows you to  
play and search all clips on the disc.  
2
3
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
To display a list of In and Out point operations that  
you can perform  
Select Move Sub Clips, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Press the MENU button.  
The Clip List (Move) screen appears.  
4
5
When you find the point that you want to make the  
start point, select “IN” and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
[
Clip List (Move)  
006  
001/034  
The timecode of the new In point appears in the  
timecode display, and the Total (total duration) and  
DUR (clip duration) displays are updated.  
TC 00:00:00:00  
TC 00:04:35:12  
TC 00:06:03:03  
TC 00:00:21:27  
TC 00:04:06:00  
TC 00:05:19:08  
TC 00:06:46:27  
TC 00:04:13:14  
TC 00:05:41:05  
TC 00:07:08:25  
TC 00:04:57:10  
TC 00:06:25:00  
When you find the point that you want to make the end  
point, select “OUT” and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
DATE&TIME 08 AUG 2007 11:50  
TOTAL DUR 00:13:48:24  
The timecode of the new Out point appears in the  
timecode display, and the Total (total duration) and  
DUR (clip duration) displays are updated.  
4
5
Move the I cursor to the point where you want to move  
the selected thumbnails.  
To cue up the In point or Out point  
Display the Thumbnail Menu, select Cue up Inpoint or  
Cue up Outpoint, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The sub clips are moved to the I cursor position.  
6
Repeat steps 1 to 5 as required.  
68  
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)  
       
To cancel the In point or Out point setting  
Display the Thumbnail Menu, select Reset Inpoint or  
Reset Outpoint, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
2
Select Set Start Time Code, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The Set Start Time Code screen appears.  
The In point or Out point setting returns to the previous  
value.  
Set Start Time Code  
6
Select OK, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
TC  
2 2 : 3 4 . 5 6 : 1 7  
M I N S E C F R M  
H
7
8
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required.  
Preset TC 00:00:00:00  
OK  
Cancel  
Save the clip list (see page 69).  
To delete sub clips  
3
4
5
Press the B/IN or b/OUT button to select the digit that  
you want to change.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) konb or the jog dial to  
change the value of the digit.  
1
Select the clips to delete in the clip list thumbnail  
screen (multiple selections possible).  
Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required.  
2
3
Display the Thumbnail Menu.  
To reset the timecode to 00:00:00:00  
Select Reset to Zero in the Thumbnail Menu, and then  
press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Select Delete Sub Clips, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion.  
To preset the frequently used timecode  
Select Save Preset TC in the Thumbnail Menu, and  
then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The timecode set in steps 4 and 5 is saved as a preset  
value.  
4
Select OK, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
5
6
Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required.  
To recall the preset timecode  
Select Recall Preset TC in the Thumbnail Menu, and  
then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Save the clip list (see page 69).  
To play the clip list  
Use the clip list thumbnail screen to play the clip list (see  
6
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
OK is selected.  
7
8
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob again.  
To change the starting timecode of clip  
lists  
The timecode of clip lists is continuous timecode,  
unrelated to the timecode of the original clips. By default  
the timecode (LTC) of the start of the clip list is  
00:00:00:00, but it can be set to any value.  
Save the clip list (see page 69).  
To save clip lists  
To save under a specified name  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the  
Thumbnail Menu.  
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc  
Menu.  
69  
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)  
         
2
Select Save Clip List As..., and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Managing clip lists  
A list of clip lists appears.  
To load clip lists  
The following procedure loads a clip list stored on the disc  
into the unit’s internal memory as the current clip list.  
Disc Menu  
Save Clip List As... Name & Date/Sorted by Name  
DVD og BI... 08 AUG2007 11:50  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
E0003  
E0004  
E0005  
E0006  
E0007  
E0095  
E0098  
03 AUG2007 17:51  
03 AUG2007 17:51  
03 AUG2007 17:51  
03 AUG2007 17:51  
03 AUG2007 17:51  
18 MAY2006 10:25  
13 JUN2006 13:43  
1
2
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc  
Menu.  
Display Select  
Select Load Clip List, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
To switch the information displayed for clip lists  
Press the b/OUT button.  
A list of clip lists stored on the disc appears.  
With each press, the display changes in the order:  
“Name & Date” >“Name & Title” >“Name & Sort  
Date” >...  
Disc Menu  
Load Clip List  
Name & Date/Sorted by Name  
DVD og BI... 08 AUG2007 11:50  
To sort clip lists  
E0003  
E0004  
E0005  
E0006  
E0007  
E0095  
E0098  
03 AUG2007 17:51  
03 AUG2007 17:51  
03 AUG2007 17:51  
03 AUG2007 17:51  
03 AUG2007 17:51  
18 MAY2006 10:25  
13 JUN2006 13:43  
Select one of the following orders by selecting  
Settings >Sort Clip List By... in the Disc Menu.  
NAME(A-Z): Sort in ascending order by clip list  
name.  
DATE(Newest First): Sort by date and time of clip  
list creation, newest first.  
Display Select  
3
Select the desired clip list, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
3
Select the desired clip list name, and then press the  
PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The name of the clip list selected here appears in the  
clip list thumbnail screen. When you execute the Save  
Clip List command in the Disc Menu, the clip list will  
be saved under that name.  
To save under the same name  
The following procedure saves the current clip list under  
its current name (the name that appears in the clip list  
thumbnail screen).  
To create a new clip list  
Select New File and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
1
2
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc  
Menu (see page 57).  
To clear clip lists  
The following procedure clears the current clip list from  
the unit’s internal memory.  
Select Save Clip List, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
The clip list is saved. However, Save Clip List As... is  
executed when the name displayed in the clip list  
thumbnail screen is “no name”.  
1
2
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc  
Menu.  
Note  
If you press the EJECT button or the on/standby button  
before saving a new or edited clip list, a message appears  
asking if you want to discard your changes and continue.  
Follow the instructions in the message to continue or  
cancel the operation.  
Select Clear Clip List, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
A message appears asking you to confirm that you  
want to clear the clip list.  
70  
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)  
         
3
Select OK, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
NAME(A-Z): Sort in ascending order by clip list  
name.  
DATE(Newest First): Sort by date and time of clip  
list creation, newest first.  
The current clip list returns to the unnamed state  
“(no name)”.  
Clip lists will be displayed in the specified order the  
next time that you carry out an operation such as  
loading a clip list.  
To delete clip lists  
The following procedure deletes a clip list from the disc.  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
1
2
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc  
Menu.  
Select Delete Clip List, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
A list of clip lists appears.  
3
Select the clip list that you want to delete, and then  
press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion.  
Delete Clip List  
E0001  
Delete this Clip List?  
OK  
Cancel  
4
Select OK, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
To sort clip lists  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
1
2
3
4
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc  
Menu.  
Select Settings, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
Select Sort Clip List, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Select one of the following sort methods, and then  
press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
71  
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)  
   
Format Disc  
Disc Operations  
All Clips, Clip Lists and  
Non-AV Data (General Files)  
will be Deleted.  
Checking disc properties  
Format OK?  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
OK  
Cancel  
1
2
Display the Disc Menu.  
3
Select OK, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob.  
Select Disc Properties, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
To cancel the format  
Select Cancel, and then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
The Disc Properties screen appears.  
knob.  
Disc Properties  
OK  
User Disc ID 12345  
To continue by formatting another disc  
Exchange the disc, select OK, and then press the  
PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Title  
(none)  
Title2  
(none)  
Total DUR  
Remain  
Rewrite  
01:23:45:00  
031min  
1234times  
To exit the formatting screen  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob with Exit selected.  
1), 2)  
User Disc ID: User disc ID  
1)  
Title: Title  
1), 2)  
Title2: Title2  
Total DUR: Total recording time  
Remain: Remaining recording time  
Rewrite: Number of times rewritten  
1) This can be specified with the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software on  
the supplied XDCAM Application Software CD-ROM.  
2) When the unit’s area of use (UC/J MODEL SELECT) (see page 25)  
is set to “UC”, titles can be displayed in European languages.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Formatting discs  
See page 58 for more information about thumbnail screen  
operations.  
1
2
Display the Disc Menu.  
Select Format Disc, and then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob.  
A message appears asking you to confirm the format.  
72  
Disc Operations  
                   
Shortcut List  
You can access many functions from the buttons, without  
displaying a menu (shortcut operations).  
Shortcuts are available for the following functions. The  
plus sign (+) indicates that one button is held down while  
another is pressed, for example “SHIFT + RESET/  
RETURN”.  
Note  
The same shortcut may access different functions,  
depending on the screen that is active when it is executed.  
Function  
Operation  
Clip List Thumbnail (display the clip list thumbnail screen) SUB CLIP  
Expand Thumbnail (display expand thumbnail screen)  
Chapter Thumbnail (display chapter thumbnail screen)  
EXPAND  
CHAPTER  
Essence Mark Thumbnail (display essence mark  
thumbnail screen)  
SHIFT + THUMBNAIL  
Add Sub Clip (add sub clip)  
Delete Clip (delete clip)  
SHIFT + PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob  
SHIFT + RESET/RETURN  
SHIFT + STOP  
Lock/Unlock Clip (lock or unlock clip)  
Set Inpoint (set In point)  
B/IN + PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob  
b/OUT + PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob  
B/IN + PREV or B/IN + NEXT  
b/OUT + PREV or b/OUT + NEXT  
B/IN + RESET/RETURN  
Set Outpoint (set Out point)  
Cue up Inpoint (cue up In point)  
Cue up Outpoint (cue up Out point)  
Reset Inpoint (reset In point)  
Reset Outpoint (reset Out point)  
Cue up (cue up)  
b/OUT + RESET/RETURN  
a)  
PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob  
b)  
Cue up & Play (cue up and play)  
PLAY  
Page Down (switch to next page)  
Page Up (switch to previous page)  
Go To End (go to the last item)  
SHIFT + v/MARK2  
SHIFT + V/MARK1  
SHIFT + NEXT  
Go To Top (go to the first item)  
SHIFT + PREV  
Select Multi Clip (select multiple clips)  
Exit (exit the current thumbnail screen)  
SHIFT + b/OUT or SHIFT + B/IN  
THUMBNAIL  
a) If Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to “Cue up &  
Play”, then playback starts as soon as cueup is ready.  
b) If Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to “Cue up &  
Play”, then pressing the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob has the same effect.  
73  
Shortcut List  
   
File Operations  
6
Chapter  
Overview  
root a)  
INDEX.XML  
ALIAS.XML b)  
A remote computer can be connected to this unit and used  
to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data  
files, such as video and audio data files.  
There are two ways to connect a remote computer.  
• FAM connection  
Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector on this unit to  
the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the remote  
computer, using an i.LINK cable (see page 28).  
• FTP connection  
DISCMETA.XML  
MEDIAPRO.XML  
SYSPRO.XML  
Clip  
C0001.MXF  
Connect the network connectors on this unit and the  
remote computer, using a network cable (see page 28).  
C0001M01.XML  
C0002.MXF  
C0002M01.XML  
C0003.MXF  
Directory structure  
The following figure shows the directory structure of discs  
visible to a remote computer.  
C0003M01.XML  
Edit  
Note  
E0001E01.SMI  
E0001M01.XML  
E0002E01.SMI  
E0002M01.XML  
This structure is not the same as the actual structure  
recorded on the disc.  
Sub  
C0001S01.MXF  
C0002S01.MXF  
C0003S01.MXF  
General  
a) Root directory  
b) Only when sub item NAMING FORM of setup menu item 036 is set to  
“free”  
74  
Overview  
           
File operation restrictions  
This section explains which operations are possible on  
files stored in each directory.  
Read: Read data sequentially from the start to the end of  
the file.  
When required, the following operation tables distinguish  
reading and writing from partial reading and writing.  
Partial read: Read only a part of the data in the file.  
Write: Write data sequentially from the start to the end of  
the file.  
Partial write: Write data to a part of the file only.  
Root directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create  
Delete  
INDEX.XML  
Contains data for management Yes  
of the material on the disc.  
No  
No  
No  
No  
a)  
Contains conversion tables for Yes  
assigning user-defined names  
to clips and clip lists.  
No  
No  
No  
No  
ALIAS.XML  
b)  
DISCMETA.XML Contains metadata to indicate Yes  
the disc properties.  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
MEDIAPRO.XML Contains a list of material on  
the disc, basic properties,  
related information, and  
Yes  
information about access  
methods.  
SYSPRO.XML  
Other files  
Contains information about  
device system settings and  
menu settings.  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Files other than the above  
a) Only when sub item NAMING FORM of setup menu item 036 is set to  
“free”  
Notes  
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM  
• Directories cannot be created in the root directory.  
• The directories in the root directory (Clip, Edit, Sub, and  
General) cannot be deleted or renamed.  
Clip directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create  
Delete  
b) c)  
b)  
d)  
a)  
Clip file created by recording  
(MXF file)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
*
C .MXF  
*: 0001 to 9999  
e)  
f)  
g)  
h)  
a)  
Metadata file generated  
automatically when C .MXF file  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
*
C M01.XML  
*
is created.  
*: 0001 to 9999  
Other files  
Files other than the above  
No  
No  
a) The unit can handle files with user-defined names in the “C*” part.  
b) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length, in a format matching  
the format (system frequency) and recording format (MPEG HD and  
number of audio channels) of the recorded sections of the disc, and which  
can be overwritten by XDCAM.  
f) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is changed, a C*M01.XML  
file with the same name in the “C*” part is also changed automatically.  
g) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*M01.XML file with the same name  
in the “C*” part is created automatically.  
h) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, a C*M01.XML file with the same name  
in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.  
c) Overwriting is not possible.  
d) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording and  
“REC INHI” is set to “OFF”. Any clip may be selected and deleted.  
e) Only files which can be written by XDCAM  
75  
Overview  
     
Note  
Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory.  
Edit directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create  
Delete  
b)  
c)  
d)  
a)  
Clip list file  
*: 0001 to 0099  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
*
E E01.SMI  
b)  
e)  
f)  
g)  
a)  
Metadata file generated  
automatically when E*E01.SMI  
file is created.  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
*
E M01.XML  
*: 0001 to 0099  
Other files  
Files other than the above  
No  
a) The “E*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.  
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. Partial writing is not  
possible.  
c) Only files which can be written by XDCAM  
d) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording and  
“REC INHI” is set to “OFF”.  
e) When the “E*” part of an “E*01.SMI” file name is changed, an  
E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part is also changed  
automatically.  
f) When an E*E01.SMI file is created, an E*M01.XML file with the same  
name in the “E*” part is also generated automatically.  
g) When an E*E01.SMI file is deleted, an E*M01.XML file with the same  
name in the “E*” part is also deleted automatically.  
Note  
Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory.  
Sub directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create  
Delete  
b)  
c)  
d)  
a)  
Proxy AV data (MXF) file  
generated automatically when  
a C*.MXF file is created.  
*: 0001 to 9999  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
*
C S01.MXF  
Other files  
Files other than the above  
No  
No  
a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.  
Note  
b) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is changed, a C*S01.MXF file  
with the same name in the “C*” part is generated automatically.  
c) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*S01.XML file with the same name in  
the “C*” part is generated automatically.  
Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory.  
d) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*S01.XML file with the same name  
in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.  
General directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create  
Delete  
a)  
b)  
Any file  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length. (Depending on the  
character type, file names (including extension) may be limited to 21  
characters.)  
• Deletion and renaming of directories  
b) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording and  
“REC INHI” is set to “OFF”.  
Notes  
• The maximum number of files that can be created on a  
disc is 5,000 for single-layer discs and 6,000 for dual-  
layer discs (both including directories).  
The following directory operations are possible in the  
General directory.  
• Directory creation (up to 64 levels, including the  
General directory)  
76  
Overview  
     
• File names and directory names can use letters, numbers,  
and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 (UTF-8) character  
set.  
3
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select “on”, and  
press the knob.  
The clip title naming screen appears.  
However, the following control characters and  
1)  
symbols cannot be used.  
RETURN  
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F  
- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ?, \, |  
ITEM-035  
SELECT  
CLIP TITLE NAMING  
SELECT  
1) The following character codes cannot be used by FAM connections.  
U+010000, U+020000, U+030000, U+040000, U+050000, U+060000,  
U+070000, U+080000, U+090000, U+0A0000, U+0B0000, U+0C0000,  
U+0D0000, U+0E0000, U+0F0000, U+100000  
*TITLE  
PREFIX  
NUMERIC  
- disable  
- TITLE  
- 00001  
SAVE  
EXIT  
SETUP  
Assigning user-defined clip titles  
By default, clips on each disc are assigned names in the  
range C0001.MXF to C9999.MXF. For this reason, two  
discs can contain clips with the same names. The  
automatic title generation function allows you to assign  
titles to all of the clips on several discs, which facilitates  
clip management. For example, if the titles TITLE00001 to  
TITLE00020 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to  
C0020.MXF on disc 1, then the titles TITLE00021 to  
TITLE00037 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to  
C0017.MXF on disc 2.  
4
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to move the asterisk  
(*) on the left of the menu items to “TITLE”, and press  
the knob.  
The asterisk indicates the selected item.  
5
6
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select “enable”,  
and press the knob.  
The automatic title generation function is enabled.  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to move the asterisk  
(*) on the left of the menu items to the item you want  
to select, and press the knob.  
C0020.MXF  
PREFIX: A string of up to 10 characters. The  
allowable characters are alphanumeric characters,  
symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) + ,- . ; = @ [ ] ^ _ { } ~),  
and the space character.  
NUMERIC: A five-digit number (00001 to 99999) to  
serve as the initial value of the serial number.  
0002.MXF  
C0001.MXF  
TITLE00020  
TITLE00002  
TITLE00001  
Clips recorded on Disc 1  
7
8
9
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select the  
character position to set, and press the knob.  
C0017.MXF  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select the  
character to set.  
0002.MXF  
C0001.MXF  
Repeat steps 7 and 8 as required.  
TITLE00037  
TITLE00022  
TITLE00021  
When you are setting the “NUMERIC” item, you can  
press the RESET/RETURN button to return the initial  
value of the serial number to 00001 (factory default  
setting).  
Clips recorded on Disc 2  
Proceed as follows to specify a title and assign it to  
recorded clips.  
10Carry out steps 7 to 9 to set the other item.  
11Press the SAVE function (F5) button.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The title is saved.  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select setup  
menu item 035, and press the knob.  
To check the titles of recorded clips  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  
screen, and select the clip whose title you want to check.  
77  
Overview  
     
The title of the selected clip appears at the upper left of the  
screen.  
• The following names should be avoided.  
- Clips: C5000.MXF to C9999.MXF  
- Clip lists: E0001.SMI to E0099.SMI  
information about the thumbnail screen.  
To assign clip names on this unit  
The title assigned to clip becomes its clip name (file  
name).  
Notes  
• The value of the serial number is incremented by 1 every  
time a title is generated. When the value reaches 99999,  
the next number restarts from 00001.  
• Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the  
serial number after recording several clips or the same is  
true depending on the value setting. Care should be taken  
when setting the serial number.  
Notes  
• When the first letter of the title setting with setup menu  
item 035 CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT is a space or  
period (.), the clip name is the title string minus the first  
letter.  
• An FTP client that supports UTF-8 is required to use  
Unicode characters other than ASCII characters.  
Command prompt FTP commands do not support  
UTF-8.  
• The “PREFIX” setting is saved in memory banks, but the  
“NUMERIC” setting is not saved (see page 94).  
Assigning user-defined clip and clip  
list names  
C0001.MXF  
The following standard format names are assigned  
automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or  
recorded by XDCAM devices.  
TITLE00001  
Clips: C0001.MXF to C9999.MXF  
Clip lists: E0001E01.SMI to E0099E01.SMI  
This unit can handle clips and clip lists with user-defined  
names as well as names in the standard format.  
When the “AUTO NAMING” sub item of setup menu  
item 036 is set to “C****”  
Limitations  
• Letters, numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2.0  
character set can be used.  
TITLE00001.MXF  
However, the following control characters and symbols  
cannot be used.  
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F  
- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ?, \, |  
TITLE00001  
• Depending on the character type, the length of user-  
defined names (the “C*” or “E*E01” part) may be  
limited to 14 characters. (The limit for ASCII characters  
is 56 characters.)  
When the “AUTO NAMING” sub item of basic menu item  
036 is set to “title”  
• All file name extensions are converted automatically to  
uppercase.  
• Titles are used as user-defined clip names on this unit.  
Therefore, the available characters are limited to those  
supported by the title function.  
• Files generated along with clips and clip lists use the  
same names (the “C*” or “E*” part of the following file  
names).  
- Clips: Metadata files (C*M01.XML), proxy AV data  
files (C*S01.MXF)  
- Clip lists: Metadata files (E*M01.XML)  
• The following names cannot be assigned.  
- Clips: C0000.MXF  
- Clip lists: E0000E01.SMI, E0100E01.SMI to  
E9999E01.SMI, E0000.SMI, E0100.SMI to  
E9999.SMI  
1
Before you start, set the “TITLE” sub item of setup  
menu item 035 CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT to  
“enable”, and set a title (see the previous section).  
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select setup  
menu item 036.  
4
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to move the “*” to  
the left of the item names to “NAMING FORM”.  
The “*” indicates the selected item.  
78  
Overview  
     
The name of the selected clip appears at the upper left of  
the screen.  
RETURN  
SELECT  
ITEM-036  
FILE NAMING  
information about the thumbnail screen.  
* NAMING FORM  
AUTO NAMING  
END  
- C****  
- C****  
SAVE  
EXIT  
Note  
The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed  
according to the following order of priority.  
SETUP  
Title >User-defined clip name >Standard format clip name  
Therefore, the display of this item changes as following,  
depending on whether there is a title.  
5
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select “free”, and  
press the knob.  
- When a title has been set as a clip name on this unit, for  
clips recorded on this unit, the title is displayed.  
- The user-defined name or standard format name is  
displayed for clips without a title.  
You are now able to use clips and clip lists with user-  
defined names.  
6
7
8
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to move the “*” to  
the left of “AUTO NAMING”, and press the knob.  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select “title”, and  
press the knob.  
Press the SAVE function (F5) button.  
The same name will now be given to newly recorded  
clips.  
To use clips and clip lists with user-defined  
names over FAM and FTP connections  
Carry out steps 2 to 5 of “To assign clip names on this  
unit”, and then press the SAVE function (F5) button.  
It is now possible to write, transfer, and rename clips and  
clip lists with user-defined names over file access mode  
(FAM) connections (page 80) and FTP connections  
Fuji.MXF  
Able to use clips with user-defined names  
over FAM and FTP connections  
Sakura.SMI  
Able to use clip lists with user-defined names  
over FAM and FTP connections  
To check clip names  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  
screen, and select the clip whose name you want to check.  
79  
Overview  
Making FAM connections  
File Operations in File  
Access Mode (for  
Windows)  
1
If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put the unit into the  
following state.  
• Recording, playback, search and other disc  
operations (see page 44): Stopped  
• THUMBNAIL button (see page 15): Off  
• Disc access by Lock or Delecte All Clips, Format  
Disc, and so on in the Disc Menu (see page 57):  
Stopped  
File access mode operating environment  
Operating system requirements for file operations by file  
access mode (called FAM below) are as follows.  
• Computer operating system: Microsoft Windows XP  
Professional SP2 or later, or Microsoft Windows Vista  
Ultimate/Business (32-bit)  
• Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear  
2
3
If this unit is connected to a remote computer by FTP,  
log out from the FTP session (see page 84).  
Note  
Connect the (i.LINK) S400connector on this unit to  
the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the remote  
computer, using an i.LINK cable (see connections  
illustration on page 28).  
64-bit editions of Windows Vista are not supported.  
Preparations  
Install the FAM driver on the remote computer (see the  
next section).  
Windows recognizes this unit as a removable disc, and  
displays one of the following icons on the remote  
computer’s task bar:  
To install the FAM driver  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM Application  
Software) into the CD-ROM drive of your computer,  
navigate to the FAM Driver directory, and run the installer  
in the directory for your operating system, then follow the  
installation instructions.  
• Windows XP:  
• Windows Vista:  
The remote computer is now able to perform file  
operations when a disc is inserted into this unit.  
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD-  
ROM disc.  
Note  
You will not be able to log in if you put the unit into  
the state described in step 1 after connecting the cable.  
To log in, disconnect the cable, put the unit into the  
state described in step 1, and connect it again.  
Note  
Use Version 2.020 or higher of the FAM driver. The FAM  
driver on the supplied CD-ROM is Version 2.020 or  
higher.  
If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer,  
check the version.  
When you make your first FAM connection  
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog appears when  
you connect this unit to your computer. Select “Install the  
software automatically (Recommended)”, and then click  
the Next button. Click the Finish button when the software  
installation finishes.  
To check the version  
Operation limitations during FAM connections  
• Front panel operations are disabled, except for  
operations with the EJECT button.  
• This unit cannot be controlled from devices connected to  
the REMOTE(9P) connector (D-sub 9-pin) and  
(i.LINK) S400 connector.  
On Windows XP  
Select “ProDisc” from “Add or Remove Programs” in the  
control panel, and then click “Click here for support  
information”.  
On Windows Vista  
1 Open “Programs” >“Programs and Functions” in the  
control panel, and then right click the header (where  
“Name” and “Supplier” are displayed) and select  
“Other...”.  
• Signal input to this unit and signal output from this unit  
are stopped.  
2 In the Advanced Settings dialog, check “Version” and  
click “OK”. The version column appears. Check the  
version of “ProDisc”.  
Operating on files  
1
Start Explorer.  
80  
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows)  
               
Check that a drive letter has been assigned to this unit.  
(The drive letter will differ depending on the number  
of other peripherals connected to the remote  
computer.)  
4
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as required.  
To reconnect  
To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one of the  
following, depending on whether an i.LINK cable is  
connected.  
2
Use Explorer to perform file operations on the disc  
loaded in this unit.  
i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit and a  
remote computer with an i.LINK cable.  
i.LINK cable is connected: Disconnect the i.LINK cable  
from either this unit or the remote computer, wait for  
at least 10 seconds, and then reconnect the  
disconnected cable.  
You can operate in the same way that you operate on  
local drives and files on network computers.  
Notes  
• If you power this unit off during an FAM  
connection, the data transferred thus far is discarded.  
• All file operations are not possible for some types of  
files.  
The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is  
connected: Power the unit on.  
To eject discs from a remote computer  
Right click the icon representing this unit in Explorer, and  
select “Eject” from the menu which appears.  
Exiting file operations  
Note  
Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to 3.  
1
Do one of the following on the  
or  
icon  
displayed in the remote computer’s taskbar.  
• Double click.  
• Right click, and select the “Safely Remove  
Hardware”.  
The “Safely Remove Hardware” dialog appears.  
2
3
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-HD1500 IEEE 1394  
SBP2 Device” and click “Stop”.  
The “Stop a Hardware device” dialog appears.  
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-HD1500 IEEE 1394  
SBP2 Device” and click “OK”.  
Windows XP: “Sony XDCAM PDW-HD1500  
IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device” is deleted from the  
“Hardware devices” list.  
Windows Vista: A message appears to inform you  
that you can now safely remove the device from  
your computer.  
This unit can now resume normal operations. (The  
limitations described in “Operation limitations during  
FAM connections” no longer apply.)  
81  
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows)  
     
computer, indicating that the computer is now able to  
perform file operations.  
File Operations in File  
Access Mode (for  
Macintosh)  
File access mode operating environment  
Operating system requirements for file operations by file  
access mode are as follows.  
• Computer operating system: Mac OS X v10.4.11 or  
higher  
Operation limitations during FAM  
connections  
• With the exception of the EJECT button, recording  
buttons and playback control buttons are disabled.  
• Do not use the EJECT button to eject discs. Always eject  
discs from the computer.  
• Do not disconnect the i.LINK cable during a FAM  
connection. Doing so may result in unstable operation.  
Always eject any loaded disc before disconnecting the  
i.LINK cable.  
Preparations  
Do the following on the remote computer and this unit.  
• Install the FAM driver on the remote computer (see the  
next item).  
To install the FAM driver  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM Application  
Software) into the CD-ROM drive of your computer, and  
execute the dmg file in FAM Driver >Mac >FAM Driver,  
then follow the installation instructions.  
Operating on files  
Proceed as follows.  
1
2
Start the Finder.  
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the  
CD-ROM disc.  
Check to be sure that a drive has been assigned to this  
unit.  
To check the FAM driver version  
Operate from the Finder on the files on the disc in this  
unit.  
Connect this unit to your computer with an i.LINK cable,  
and then, with a disc loaded, start the system profiler utility  
of the application. The version appears to the right of  
“prodisk_fs” when you select “Advanced Functions”  
under “Software”.  
You can operate in the same way that you operate on  
local drives and files on network computers.  
Note  
• If you power this unit off during a FAM connection, the  
data transferred thus far is discarded.  
• All file operations are not possible for some types of  
files.  
Making FAM connections  
1
If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put the unit into the  
following state.  
• Recording, playback, search and other disc  
operations (see page 44): Stopped  
• THUMBNAIL button (see page 15): Off  
• Disc access by clip deletion, disc formatting, etc.:  
Stopped  
To eject discs from a remote computer  
Click the eject button to the right of the icon for this unit in  
the Finder, or drag the icon for this unit from the Finder to  
the Trash.  
• MENU button (see page 15): Off  
• Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear  
2
Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector on this unit to  
the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the remote  
computer, using an i.LINK cable (see page 28).  
Exiting file operations  
Proceed as follows.  
When a disc is inserted into this unit, the remote  
computer recognizes this unit as a removable disc. The  
following icon appears in the Finder on the remote  
82  
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh)  
               
Note  
FTP File Operations  
Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 and  
2.  
File operations between this unit and a remote computer  
can be carried out by the File Transfer Protocol (called  
FTP below).  
1
Eject the disc by clicking the eject button to the right  
of the icon for this unit in the Finder, or by dragging  
the icon for this unit from the Finder to the Trash.  
2
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as required.  
Preparations  
1
Connect the network connectors of this unit and a  
remote computer with a network cable (see  
connections illustration on page 28). Or connect this  
unit to the network to which the remote computer is  
connected (see connections illustration on page 28).  
To make a reconnection  
To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one of the  
following, depending on whether an i.LINK cable is  
connected.  
i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit and a  
remote computer with an i.LINK cable.  
i.LINK cable is connected: The unit is mounted  
automatically, so you do not need to do anything.  
The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is  
connected: Power the unit on.  
2
Set the IP address and other network setting items for  
1)  
this unit.  
If network settings have already been made  
Check the IP address of this unit.  
1)This unit is able to acquire an IP address automatically from a DHCP  
server. It also supports an Auto-IP function to assign an IP address  
automatically when access from this unit to the DHCP server times  
out. You can check DHCP settings and the assigned IP address on  
page M5:NETWORK of the maintenance menu.  
3
Set the remote control switch to “NET” (see page 13).  
Making FTP connections  
FTP connections between this unit and a remote computer  
can be made with either of the following.  
• The command prompt  
• FTP client software  
This section explains how to use the command prompt. For  
more information about using FTP client software, refer to  
the documentation of the FTP client software on your  
system.  
Note  
An FTP client that supports UTF-8 is required to use  
Unicode characters other than ASCII characters.  
Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF-8.  
83  
FTP File Operations  
           
To log in  
To log out  
If this unit is connected to a remote computer with a FAM  
connection, first exit file operations on the FAM  
connection (see page 81).  
To log out after finishing file operations, enter “QUIT” at  
the command prompt and press the Enter key.  
1
Load a disc into this unit and put the unit into the  
following state.  
Command list  
The FTP protocol commands supported by this unit  
include standard commands (see the next section) and  
extended commands (see page 87).  
• Recording, playback, search and other disc  
operations (see page 44): Stopped  
• THUMBNAIL button (see page 15): Off  
• Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips, Format  
Disc, and so on in the Disc Menu (see page 57):  
Stopped  
Notes  
• To execute FTP commands, you must install application  
software such as PDZ-1 on your computer.  
Note  
• The commands supported by application software vary.  
• In the command syntax, <SP> means a space, entered by  
pressing the space bar, and <CRLF> means a new line,  
entered by pressing the Enter key.  
Login is not possible unless a disc is loaded and the  
unit is in the state described above.  
2
3
Start the command prompt.  
Standard commands  
Enter “ftp <SP> <IP address>”, and press the Enter  
key. (<SP> refers to a space.)  
USER  
For example, if the IP address of this unit is set to  
“192.168.001.010”, enter “ftp 192.168.1.10”.  
Send this command to begin the login process.  
Command syntax: USER <SP> <user name> <CRLF>  
Refer to the Windows help for more information about  
the FTP command.  
Input example: USER admin  
PASS  
If the connection succeeds, you are prompted to enter  
a user name.  
After sending the USER command, send this command to  
complete the login process.  
4
5
Enter the user name “admin” and press the Enter key.  
Command syntax: PASS <SP> <password> <CRLF>  
Input example: PASS pdw-hd1500  
When the user name is verified, you are prompted to  
enter a password.  
QUIT  
Enter the password and press the Enter key.  
Terminates the FTP connection. If a file is being  
transferred, terminates after completion of the transfer.  
The password is set to “pdw-hd1500” when the unit is  
shipped from the factory.  
Command syntax: QUIT <CRLF>  
The login is complete when the password is verified.  
See page 84 for the FTP protocol commands  
supported by this unit.  
PORT  
Specifies the IP address and port to which this unit should  
connect for the next file transfer (for data transfer from this  
unit).  
If the connection times out  
This unit terminates FTP connections if no command  
is received within 90 seconds of the last command. If  
this occurs, log out (see the next section) and repeat  
steps 2 to 4.  
Command syntax: PORT <SP> <h1,h2,h3,h4,p1,p2>  
<CRLF>  
• h1 (most significant byte) to h4 (least significant byte): IP  
address  
Note  
• p1 (most significant byte), p2 (least significant byte): Port  
address  
If you power this unit off during an FTP connection,  
the data transferred thus far is discarded.  
Input example: PORT 10,0,0,1,242,48  
(IP address: 10.0.0.1, Port number: 62000)  
84  
FTP File Operations  
           
Input example: MODE S  
PASV  
This command requests this unit to “listen” on a data port  
(which is not its default data port). (It puts this unit into  
passive mode, waiting for the remote computer to make a  
data connection.)  
LIST  
Sends a list of files from this unit to the remote computer.  
Command syntax: LIST <SP> <options> <SP> <path-  
name> <CRLF>  
Command syntax: PASV <CRLF>  
<options> can be any of the following.  
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “.”  
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.  
TYPE  
Specifies the type of data to be transferred.  
Command syntax: TYPE <SP> <type-code (options  
delimited by <SP>)> <CRLF>  
The following data is transferred, depending on whether  
<path-name> specifies a directory or file.  
• Directory specified: A list of the files in the specified  
directory  
<type-code> can be any of the following. However, for  
XDCAM, data is always transferred as “I”, regardless of  
the type-code specification.  
• File specified: Information about the specified file  
• No specification: A list of the files in the current directory  
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?” (any  
character) may be used in <path-name>.  
• A: ASCII  
- N: Non-print  
- T: Telnet format  
- C: ASA Carriage Control  
Input example 1: LIST-a Clip  
• E: EBCDIC  
- N: Non-print  
Input example 2: LIST Clip/*.MXF  
- T: Telnet format  
- C: ASA Carriage Control  
NLST  
• I: IMAGE (Binary) (default)  
Sends a list of file names from this unit to the remote  
computer, with no other information.  
• L: LOCAL BYTE  
- SIZE: byte size  
Command syntax: NLST <SP> <options or path-name>  
<CRLF>  
Input example: TYPE I  
The following options may be specified when no path-  
name is specified.  
STRU  
Specifies the data structure.  
Command syntax: STRU <SP> <structure-code>  
<CRLF>  
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “.”.  
• -l: Display information other than file name (gives the same  
result as the LIST command).  
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.  
<structure-code> can be any of the following. However,  
for XDCAM, the structure is always “F”, regardless of the  
structure-code specification.  
The following data is transferred, depending on whether  
<path-name> specifies a directory or file.  
• Directory specified: A list of the file names only in the  
specified directory  
• F: File structure (default)  
• R: Record structure  
• P: Page structure  
• No specification: A list of the file names only in the current  
directory.  
Input example: STRU F  
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?” (any  
character) may be used in <path-name>.  
Input example 1: NLST-l  
MODE  
Specifies the transfer mode.  
Command syntax: MODE <SP> <mode-code> <CRLF>  
Input example 2: NLST Clip/*.MXF  
<mode-code> can be any of the following. However, for  
XDCAM, the mode is always “S”, regardless of the mode-  
code specification.  
RETR  
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on  
this unit to the current directory on the remote computer.  
• S: Stream mode (default)  
• B: Block mode  
Command syntax: RETR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
• C: Compressed mode  
Input example: RETR Clip/C0001.MXF  
85  
FTP File Operations  
Command syntax: DELE <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
STOR  
Input example: DELE Clip/C0099.MXF  
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on  
the remote computer to the current directory on this unit.  
Depending on the type of file transferred, the following  
files are created.  
STAT  
Sends information about properties of the specified file, or  
about data transfer status, from this unit to the remote  
computer.  
1)  
• C*.MXF file  
-C*M01.XML file (metadata)  
The following property information is sent, depending on  
-C*S01.MXF file (proxy AV data)  
the file type.  
2)  
• E*E01.SMI file  
• MXF file  
- File name  
-E*M01.XML file (metadata)  
1) *: 0001 to 9999  
2) *: 0001 to 0099  
- File type  
- CODEC type  
- Frame rate  
- Number of audio channels  
- Duration  
Notes  
• For C*.MXF files, the UMID of the copy source file is  
not saved. However, it is saved if an immediately  
preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been  
issued.  
• For C*.MXF files, some data, such as file header  
metadata, may be missing.  
- UMID  
• non-MXF file  
- File name  
Command syntax: STAT <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
• Depending on the transfer destination directory and the  
file type, transfer may not be possible.  
The following data is transferred, depending on whether a  
file is specified with <path-name>.  
• File specified: The properties of the specified file  
• No specification: The size of the data transferred thus far  
(unit: bytes)  
Command syntax: STOR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
Input example: STOR Edit/E0001E01.SMI  
Input example: STAT Clip/C0001.MXF  
RNFR  
RNTO  
ABOR  
Requests this unit to abort a file transfer currently in  
progress.  
Rename a file.  
Specify the file to be renamed with the RNFR command,  
and specify the new name with the RNTO command.  
(Always follow a RNFR command with a RNTO  
command.)  
Command syntax: ABOR <CRLF>  
SYST  
Displays the system name of this unit.  
Command syntax: SYST <CRLF>  
Command syntax: RNFR <SP> <path-name (before  
change)> <CRLF>  
HELP  
Displays a list of the commands supported by this unit, or  
an explanation of the specified command.  
Command syntax: HELP <SP> <command-name>  
<CRLF>  
RNTO <SP> <path-name (after change)> <CRLF>  
Input example: RNFR General/info.txt  
RNTO General/clip_info.txt  
DELE  
The following data is transferred, depending on whether a  
command name is specified with <command-name>.  
• Command name specified: Explanation of the specified  
command.  
Deletes the specified file on this unit.  
Note  
• No specification: Command list  
Depending on the directory and file type, deletion may not  
be possible.  
Input example: HELP RETR  
86  
FTP File Operations  
NOOP  
Note  
Does nothing except return a response. (Used to check  
whether this unit is running.)  
In the Command syntax, <SP> means a space, entered by  
pressing the space bar, and <CRLF> means a new line,  
entered by pressing the Enter key.  
Command syntax: NOOP <CRLF>  
PWD  
SITE REPF  
Displays the current directory (“/” if the directory is the  
root directory).  
Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to  
the remote computer. This command allows you to specify  
a segment in the body of the MXF file (composed of video  
and audio data), for transfer of the required segment only.  
Command syntax: PWD <CRLF>  
CWD  
Notes  
Changes the current directory (moves from the current  
directory to another directory).  
• A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified.  
• This command cannot be used when the path names  
contains a space. Use the SITE REPFL command  
instead.  
Command syntax: CWD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
Moves to a directory as follows, depending on whether a  
directory is specified with <path-name>.  
• Directory specified: To the specified directory  
• No specification: To the root directory  
Command syntax: SITE REPF <SP> <path-name> <SP>  
<start-frame> <SP> <transfer-size> <CRLF>  
<start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of the file.  
Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset (the  
first frame is 0).  
<transfer-size> specifies the number of video frames to  
transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file).  
Input example: CWD General  
CDUP  
Moves one level up in the directory structure (makes the  
parent of the current directory be the current directory).  
Input example: SITE REPF Clip/C0001.MXF 5 150  
(Transfer C0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only  
from frame 6 to frame 150.)  
Command syntax: CDUP <CRLF>  
MKD  
Creates a new directory.  
SITE REPFL  
Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to  
the remote computer. This command allows you to specify  
a segment in the body of the MXF file (composed of video  
and audio data), for transfer of the required segment only.  
Note  
Directories can be created only in the General directory.  
Note  
Command syntax: MKD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified.  
Command syntax: SITE REPFL <SP> “<path-name>”  
<SP> <start-frame> <SP> <transfer-size> <CRLF>  
RMD  
Deletes a directory.  
<path-name> specifies the path name of the file to transfer.  
Enclose the path name in double quotation marks.  
<start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of the file.  
Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset (the  
first frame is 0).  
Note  
Directories can be deleted only in the General directory.  
<transfer-size> specifies the number of video frames to  
transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file).  
Command syntax: RMD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
Input example: SITE REPFL “Clip/sakura 0001.MXF” 5 150  
(Transfer sakura 0001.MXF. Body data is transferred  
only from frame 6 to frame 150.)  
Extended commands  
The following table shows the extended FTP commands  
supported by this unit.  
SITE FSTS  
Acquires the system status of this unit.  
87  
FTP File Operations  
 
- 777: Allow writing to and execution of the file.  
One of the following status codes is sent.  
• 0: Initial state, or no disc is loaded.  
• 1: File system mount is OK.  
Input example: SITE CHMOD 444 Clip/C0001.MXF  
(Lock clip C0001.MXF)  
• 3: File system mount is not OK.  
Command syntax: SITE FSTS <CRLF>  
SITE MEID  
Acquires the media ID of the disc loaded in this unit.  
Command syntax: SITE MEID <CRLF>  
SITE FUNC  
Acquires the function and version of the extended  
commands.  
Information is sent in the following format.  
Command syntax: <main function> <SP> <branch  
function> <SP> <branch function version>  
For XDCAM, sent in a format like “200 MXF DISK 1”  
(“200” is a response code).  
Command syntax: SITE FUNC <CRLF>  
SITE UMMD  
When a C*.MXF file is sent with the STOR command, the  
copy source UMID is saved if this command is invoked  
immediately before the STOR command.  
Command syntax: SITE UMMD <CRLF>  
SITE DF  
Acquires the amount of free disc space.  
Command syntax: SITE DF <CRLF>  
SITE CHMOD  
Locks and unlocks clips. Also sets permissions for  
directories and files in the General directory.  
Command syntax: SITE CHMOD <SP> <flag> <SP>  
<path-name> <CRLF>  
Specify one of the following values in <flag>, according to  
the specification in <path-name>.  
• When a clip is specified in <path-name>  
- 444: Lock.  
- 666: Unlock.  
• When a directory in the General directory is specified in  
<path-name>  
- 555: Forbid writing to the directory.  
- 777: Allow writing to the directory.  
• When a file in the General directory is specified in <path-  
name>  
- 444: Forbid writing to and execution of the file.  
- 555: Forbid writing to the file, but allow execution.  
- 666: Allow writing to the file, but forbid execution.  
88  
FTP File Operations  
Recording Continuous  
Timecode With FAM and  
FTP Connections  
When you are connected to the unit by FAM or FTP, you  
can create new clips with timecode that is continuous with  
the timecode of the last frame of the last clip on the disc.  
To record continuous timecode, set TCG on page P4 TC of  
the function menu to “INT”, and set PRST/RGN to “TC”.  
Then proceed as follows.  
Note  
Continuous timecode cannot be recorded if PRST/RGN on  
page P4 TC of the function menu is set to “VITC”.  
information.  
FAM connection  
Write clip files to the unit from the computer or other  
device that is connected to this unit.  
FTP connection  
Use the “STOR” command to transfer clip files from the  
computer that is connected to this unit.  
If you issue the “SITE UMMD” command immediately  
before the “STOR” command, the original timecode of the  
transferred file is recorded, regardless of the setting of  
TCG on page P4 TC of the function menu.  
89  
Recording Continuous Timecode With FAM and FTP Connections  
     
Menus  
7
Chapter  
Menu System  
Configuration  
Setup Menu  
The setup menu system of this unit comprises the basic  
setup menu and extended setup menu.  
The settings for this unit use the following menus.  
Basic menu  
Setup menu  
The setup menu system of this unit comprises the basic  
setup menu and extended setup menu.  
This menu is used to make settings relating, for example,  
to the following.  
- the digital hours meter  
- the preroll time  
- the text information superimposed on the video output  
to the monitor  
Maintenance menu  
This provides audio control, and network and setup menu  
settings, and also shows version information.  
- the menu banks for retaining menu settings  
For details, see “Maintenance Menu” (page 108).  
Extended menu  
This menu is used to make a wide range of settings  
relating to the functions of this unit, for example, the  
control panel functions, video and audio control, and  
digital data processing.  
Function menu  
Configuration of the basic menu  
The basic menu comprises the following groups of items.  
Disc Menu  
Item group  
Function  
Refer to  
For details, see “Disc Operations” (page 72).  
Items  
H01 to H17  
Display of the total number of  
hours the unit has been  
powered on, and other  
information collected by the  
digital hours meter  
Items  
001 to 099  
Settings relating to the preroll  
time, superimposed text  
information, switching between  
59.94i and 50i modes, etc.  
Items  
B01 to B20  
Settings relating to the menu  
banks for saving menu settings  
Configuration of the extended menu  
The extended menu comprises the following groups of  
items.  
Item group  
Function  
Refer to  
Items  
100 to 199  
Settings relating to control  
panels  
90  
Menu System Configuration / Setup Menu  
                   
Item group  
Function  
Refer to  
Items  
200 to 299  
Settings relating to the remote page 98  
control interface  
Items  
300 to 399  
Settings relating to editing  
operations  
Items  
400 to 499  
Settings relating to preroll  
Items  
500 to 599  
Settings relating to disc  
protection  
Items  
600 to 650  
Settings relating to the  
timecode generator  
Items  
651 to 699  
Settings relating to the  
metadata and UMID  
Items  
700 to 799  
Settings relating to video  
control  
Items  
800 to 899  
Settings relating to audio  
control  
Items  
900 to 999  
Settings relating to digital  
processing  
Items in the basic menu  
The basic menu items (excluding the items related to the  
digital hours meter) are listed in the following table.  
connector, or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER)  
connector.  
• An abbreviated name appears in the time data display  
area when you press the NEXT button.  
• Item names are the names which appear on the video  
monitor screen of this unit and an external monitor,  
when the input signals to the monitor are the video  
signals output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER) connector, the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER)  
• The values in the Settings column are the values which  
appear in the time data display area. (The values may  
appear in a different format on an external monitor. In  
this case, the external monitor values are shown in  
parentheses.) Underlined values are the factory defaults.  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
001  
002  
PREROLL TIME  
0 s (0 sec)... 5 s (5 sec)... 30 s (30 sec): Set the preroll time to between 0  
and 30 seconds in steps of 1 second.  
A preroll time of at least 5 seconds is recommended when using this  
unit for editing.  
CHARACTER H-POSITION  
CHARACTER V-POSITION  
Adjust the horizontal screen position (as a hexadecimal value) of the text  
information output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector,  
the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector, or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER) connector for superimposed display on the monitor.  
00... 0C ...28: The hexadecimal value 00 is for the far left of the screen.  
Increasing the value moves the position of the characters to the right.  
Set this item by adjusting to the required position while viewing the monitor.  
003  
Adjust the vertical screen position (as a hexadecimal value) of the text  
information output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector,  
the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector, or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER) connector for superimposed display on the monitor.  
00... 2A ...32: The hexadecimal value 00 is for the top of the screen.  
Increasing the value lowers the position of the characters.  
Set this item by adjusting to the required position while viewing the monitor.  
91  
Setup Menu  
         
Item number Item name  
005 DISPLAY INFORMATION  
Settings  
Determine the kind of text information to be output from the COMPOSITE  
OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector, the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector,  
or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector.  
SELECT  
T&sta (time data & status): Time data and the units status.  
T&UB (time data & UB): Time data and user bits data. (When UB (user bits  
data) is selected with CNTR SEL on the HOME page of the function  
menu, the user bits data and time data arranged in that order are  
displayed.)  
T&CNT (time data & CNT): Time data and counter count. (When  
COUNTER is selected with CNTR SEL on the HOME page of the  
function menu, the counter count and time data arranged in that order  
are displayed.)  
T&T (time data & timecode): Time data and timecode (TC or VITC)  
T&clp (time data & clip no): Time data and clip number  
time (time data only): Time data only  
006  
LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE  
Determine which recording and playback control buttons on the front panel  
are enabled when this unit is controlled from external equipment.  
dis (all disable): All buttons and switches are disabled.  
st&ej (stop & eject): Only the STOP button and EJECT button are enabled.  
ena (all enable): All buttons and switches are enabled.  
007  
009  
DISC TIMER DISPLAY  
CHARACTER TYPE  
Determine whether to display the counter in 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode.  
+ –12H (+/–12H): 12-hour mode  
24H: 24-hour mode  
Determine the type of characters such as timecode output from the  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector, the SDSDI OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER) connector, or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector for  
superimposed display on the monitor.  
white: White letters on a black background  
black: Black letters on a white background  
W/out: White letters with black outline  
B/out: Black letters with white outline  
Set this item by selecting the required type while viewing the monitor.  
011  
CHARACTER V-SIZE  
Determine the vertical size of characters such as timecode output from the  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector, the SDSDI OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER) connector, or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector for  
superimposed display on the monitor.  
×1  
:Standard size  
×2 :2 times standard size  
Set this item by selecting the required size while viewing the monitor.  
012  
013  
CONDITION DISPLAY ON  
VIDEO MONITOR  
Select whether to display disc condition marks in external monitor output  
(output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector, the SDSDI  
OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector, or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER)  
connector).  
dis (disable): Do not display.  
ena (enable): Display.  
SYSTEM FREQUENCY  
SELECT MENU  
Specify whether to enable switching the system frequencies (59.94i, 50i).  
off: Do not enable switching the system frequencies.  
on: Enable switching the system frequencies.  
For details about switching the system frequencies, see page 25.  
Note  
Settings for basic and expanded menu items are saved for both 59.94i mode  
and 50i mode. Therefore, when you switch system frequencies, all menu  
items are reset to the current settings for the new mode. (They are different  
from the setting for the previous mode.)  
92  
Setup Menu  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
016  
ALARM DISPLAY  
Select whether to display alarm messages.  
off: Do not display alarm messages. (However, certain important alarms are  
displayed.)  
limit (on (limited)): Display only a minimum number of alarm messages.  
on: Display all alarm messages.  
For details about alarm message display conditions, see “Alarms”  
017  
SUB STATUS DISPLAY SELECT Determine the kind of sub status information to be output from the  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector, the SDSDI OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER) connector, or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector.  
off: Do not output sub status information.  
tc (tc mode): Settings of items 626 and 627  
rmain (disc remain): Available disc space (unit: minute)  
clip (clip no): Order of playback of the selected clip/total number of clips  
pbr (playback remain): The remaining playback time of the selected clip  
from the current playback position (hours:minutes:seconds:frames).  
Note  
When menu item 005 is set to “off”, sub status information is not displayed  
when this item is set to anything other than “off”.  
024  
MENU CHARACTER TYPE  
Determine the type of characters in menu text output from the COMPOSITE  
OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector, the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector,  
or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector for superimposed display on  
the monitor.  
white: White letters on a black background.  
black: Black letters on a white background.  
W/out: White letters with black outline.  
B/out: Black letters with white outline.  
Set this item by selecting the required type while viewing the monitor.  
028  
029  
HD CHARACTER  
Specify whether to superimpose text information on the video signal output  
from the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector.  
off: Do not superimpose.  
f-key: Follow the function menu setting.  
STORED OWNERSHIP  
Specify whether to enable changing UMID ownership information settings  
(COUNTRY, ORGANIZATION and USER).  
off: Do not enable.  
on: Enable.  
See “Using UMID Data” (page 127) for more information about UMID.  
033  
034  
BATTERY END VOLTAGE  
Sets the voltage to shut down the unit in the battery operation. The battery  
near end indicator flashes at +0.7 V of the set voltage.  
10.5V to 13.5V: 10.5 V to 13.5 V in 0.5 V unit.  
MENU STATUS DISPLAY ON  
Specify whether to display the setup menu status at the left edge of the  
status display line when setup menu item 005 “DISPLAY INFORMATION  
SELECT” is set to “T&sta”.  
a)  
VIDEO MONITOR  
dis (disable): Do not display.  
ena (enable): Display. (The display is visible only when no disc is loaded,  
and during insertion and ejection of a disc.)  
93  
Setup Menu  
     
Item number Item name  
Settings  
035  
Specify whether to allow user definition of the titles assigned to clips.  
off: Do not allow assignment.  
on: Allow assignment.  
CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT  
assigning titles.  
Sub-item  
1
2
TITLE  
Specify whether to assign titles to recorded clips.  
disable: Do not assign titles to clips.  
enable: Assign titles to clips.  
PREFIX  
Set the prefix of the title (up to 10 characters). The allowable characters are  
alphanumeric characters, symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) + , - . ; = @ [ ] ^ _ { } ~), and  
the space character.  
TITLE  
3
NUMERIC  
Set the initial value of the numeric part of the title (00001 to 99999, five-digit  
number).  
00001  
036  
FILE NAMING  
Sub-item  
Specify whether to allow use of clip and clip list files with user-defined  
names.  
how to make the settings.  
1
NAMING FORM  
Specify the clip and clip list naming format. (Specify whether to allow use of  
files with user-defined names.)  
C****: Standard format (Do not allow use of files with user-defined names)  
free: Free format (Allow use of files with user-defined names)  
2
AUTO NAMING  
When “free” is selected under the sub-item “NAMING FORM”, specify  
whether to use the standard format name or the same name as the title for  
clips recorded on this unit.  
C****: Use the standard format for clip names.  
title: Use the title set in setup menu item 035 “CLIP TITLE NAMING  
SELECT” for clip names.  
B01  
B02  
B03  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B20  
RECALL SETUP BANK-1  
RECALL SETUP BANK-2  
RECALL SETUP BANK-3  
SAVE SETUP BANK-1  
SAVE SETUP BANK-2  
SAVE SETUP BANK-3  
RESET SETUP MENU  
Set to “on” to recall menu settings from menu bank 1.  
Set to “on” to recall menu settings from menu bank 2.  
Set to “on” to recall menu settings from menu bank 3.  
Set to “on” to save current menu settings to menu bank 1.  
Set to “on” to save current menu settings to menu bank 2.  
Set to “on” to save current menu settings to menu bank 3.  
Set to “on” to return the settings of the current menu to the factory default  
settings. Set to “bank-4” to set the current menu to the settings saved in  
menu bank 4.  
off:  
on: Return the current menu to the factory default settings.  
bank-4: Set the current menu to the settings saved in menu bank 4.  
Basic menu operations  
The setup menus are displayed in the time data display area  
of the basic operation display or on the video monitor  
display. If you have connected an external monitor, they  
are also superimposed over the picture shown on that  
monitor.  
94  
Setup Menu  
         
To display the setup menu  
Buttons used to change settings  
Use the following buttons to change setup menu settings.  
Menu control  
buttons  
Functions  
EJECT  
MENU button  
• Displays and hides the setup and user  
interface menus.  
• Returns to the menu from a setting  
screen.  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
OUT  
DATA  
DATA  
CHAR SEL  
ON  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
AES/EBU  
AES/EBU HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
HD-SDI  
0
0
0
0
59.94i  
422-1080  
50Mbps  
PB/EE  
EE  
MENU  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
8CH-24BIT  
ALL CH  
REC INH  
OFF  
VAR/JOG  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
CH-2  
RESET  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DEFAULT  
RM-9P  
CNTR SEL  
TC  
L
1
2
R
3
4
5
6
7
8
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
REPEAT  
RETURN  
PDW-HD1500  
001/001 000:00  
TCG SET  
SHTL/JOG  
59.94i HD422-1080 50Mbps 8CH-24BIT HD-SDI INPUT  
VITC VITC INT-PRESET R-RUN  
REM:020M  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob  
• When turned clockwise or  
counterclockwise, moves the “*” mark  
up or down in the list of menu items to  
select the item to change.  
• When turned clockwise or  
counterclockwise, changes a menu  
item setting.  
ON  
PRE-  
12 34 47 12  
: : : .  
SET  
HOME  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
DISPLAY button  
MENU button  
Time data display area  
• When pressed, answers “Yes” to a  
question.  
Press the MENU button.  
A setup menu appears on the video monitor display, and a  
cursor “*” indicates the currently selected menu item.  
Function buttons RETURN: Goes up one level.  
F1 to F6  
SELECT: Selects an item.  
UP: Skips back 100 or 50 items in the  
list of menu items.  
(The function to  
be displayed  
varies depending DOWN: Skips forward 100 or 50 items in  
on the situations.)  
the list of menu items.  
SAVE: Saves a new setting to memory.  
EXIT: Exits the current menu.  
–: Changes a setting.  
Cursor indicating the currently selected item  
Group name for the currently selected item  
+: Changes a setting.  
HOUR METER  
*HO1:OPE HOURS  
RESET/RETURN • Returns the current setting to the  
button  
-
H11:OPE HOURS r-  
102  
102  
factory default.  
• Answers “No” to a question.  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
To change the settings of menu items  
Proceed as follows to change the settings of menu items.  
1
Use the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select the required  
item.  
To display menus on the external monitor  
Connect the monitor to the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER) connector, SDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER)  
connector, or HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector on  
this unit, and press the MENU button.  
Example: Screen display when item 005 DISPLAY  
INFORMATION SELECT is selected  
Current setting  
KEY PARAMETER  
To display menus in the time data display area  
Press the MENU button to display a setup menu on the  
video monitor display, and press the DISPLAY button.  
The video monitor display is switched the basic operation  
display, and the number and setting of the currently  
selected menu item appear in the time data display area.  
0O1:P-ROLL TIME -  
002:CHARA H-POS -  
003:CHARA V-POS -  
*005:DISPLAY SEL - T&CNT  
006:LOCAL ENA - st&ej  
007:DISC TIMER - +-12H  
009:CHARA TYPE - white  
011:CHARA SIZE -  
012:COND DISPLY -  
013:SYSTEM FREQ -  
5 s  
0A  
2E  
x1  
dis  
off  
on  
016:ALARM  
-
2
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob or the SELECT  
function button (F2).  
H01: 000109  
This displays the setting screen 2 for the menu item  
selected in step 1.  
Item number (flashing)  
Setting  
To display the full item name  
Hold down the NEXT button.  
Example: Setting screen display when item 005  
DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT is selected  
95  
Setup Menu  
   
To return a particular setting to its factory default  
setting  
In the screen that selects the setting of that item, press the  
RESET/RETURN button.  
For example, proceed as follows to return the 005  
DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT item to its default  
setting. This assumes that the setting has been changed  
from the factory default “time data & status” in step 3 of  
ITEM-005  
DISPLAY INFORMATION  
SELECT  
time data & CNT  
Current setting  
1
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
3
4
Use the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob or the +/– function  
button (F3 or F4) to change the setting.  
“time data & status” (factory default setting) is  
selected.  
To change other settings, press the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob or the SELECT function button (F2) to return to  
the previous screen, then repeat steps 1 to 3.  
2
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The setting returned to its factory default is saved in  
memory as the current setting.  
5
When you have completed the settings, press the  
SAVE function button (F5).  
To return all settings to their factory default  
settings  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears on the video  
monitor display, and “Saving...” appears in the time  
data display area, while the new settings are saved in  
memory. When the saving operation is completed, the  
video monitor display and the time data display area  
return to their normal indications.  
1
2
Press the MENU button to display the setup menu.  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
A message appears, to confirm whether you wish to  
return all settings to their factory default settings.  
Notes  
Message on the video  
monitor display  
Initialize all items to factory  
preset values?  
• If you power off the unit before a save operation is  
completed, settings may be lost. Wait until the save is  
completed before powering off the unit.  
• If, instead of pressing the SAVE function button (F5),  
you press the MENU button, the new settings are not  
saved. The message “ABORT !” appears on the video  
monitor display and “Abort !” in the time data display  
area for about 0.5 seconds, and the system exits the  
menus. To change more than one setting, be sure to press  
the SAVE function button (F5) after making the settings.  
Message in the time data Init setup?  
display area  
3
Press the SAVE function button (F5).  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears on the video  
monitor display, and “Saving...” appears in the time data  
display area, while the settings of all items are returned to  
their factory default settings. These factory default settings  
are saved in memory. If you power off the unit while  
settings are being saved, settings may not be correctly  
returned to their factory default settings. Wait until the  
saving is completed before powering off the unit.  
To return menu settings to their factory  
default settings  
After changing menu settings, use the following procedure  
to return the settings to their factory default settings  
(setting initialization).  
To abandon the resetting operation  
Instead of pressing the SAVE function button (F5), press  
the RESET/RETURN button. The display returns to the  
top level of the setup menu, leaving the settings  
unchanged.  
Items in the extended menu  
The following tables show the items in the extended menu.  
96  
Setup Menu  
             
• Item names are the names which appear on an external  
monitor to which the output of the COMPOSITE  
OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector, the SDSDI OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER) connector, or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2  
(SUPER) connector is input.  
• The values in the Settings columns are the values which  
appear in the time data display area. (The values may  
appear in a different format on an external monitor. In  
this case, the external monitor values are shown in  
parentheses.) Underlined values are the factory defaults.  
• An abbreviated name appears in the time data display  
area when you press the NEXT button.  
Menu items in the 100s, relating to the control panels  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
101  
105  
107  
108  
SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL  
ENABLE  
Select how the unit enters the shuttle, jog, or variable speed mode.  
dial (dial direct): Press the SHTL/JOG or VAR/JOG button or, except  
during recording/editing, turn the jog dial or shuttle dial.  
key (via search key): Press the SHTL/JOG or VAR/JOG button.  
REFERENCE SYSTEM ALARM  
Select whether to display a warning when the reference video signal is  
not being supplied, or when it differs from this unit’s system frequency.  
off: No warning.  
on: Flash the STOP button as a warning.  
REC INHIBIT LAMP FLASHING  
AUTO EE SELECT  
Select whether to flash the REC INHI indicator when recording is  
off: Light the REC INHI indicator.  
on: Flash the REC INHI indicator.  
When a disc is inserted and PB/EE on the HOME page of the function  
menu is set to “EE”, select the operation modes in which input video and  
audio signals are automatically handled in E-E mode.  
S/F/R (stop/f.fwd/f.rev): In stop/fast-forward/fast-reverse modes  
stop: In stop mode  
109  
114  
FORCED EE WHEN DISC UNLOAD During disc loading/unloading and when no disc is inserted, select  
whether to control the output signal PB/EE setting.  
on: Do not control (the signal is always an E-E signal).  
off: Control.  
AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT LEVEL Select whether to control the level of the audio signal output from the  
AUDIO MONITOR R, L connectors with the LEVEL knob for the  
PHONES jack.  
var (variable): Control.  
fixed: Do not control.  
118  
KEY INHIBIT SWITCH EFFECTIVE Select which buttons can be operated when the KEY INHI switch is set to  
AREA  
“ON”. The following sub-items control different sets of buttons  
independently.  
Sub-item  
1
FUNCTION-KEY  
Select whether function buttons on the front panel are enabled.  
dis (disable): Disabled.  
ena (enable): Enabled.  
2
CONTROL PANEL  
Select operable switches and buttons on the front panel are enabled.  
dis (disable): Disabled.  
ena (enable): Enabled.  
119  
121  
130  
VARIABLE SPEED LIMIT IN KEY  
FRAME PB MODE  
Select the playback speed range when carrying out playback in variable  
speed mode from the front panel of this unit.  
off (off (–1 to +2)): –1 to +2 times normal speed.  
on (on ( 0 to +1)): 0 to +1 times normal speed.  
Select the variable playback field/frame mode.  
auto: Field playback  
frame: Frame playback. Compared to field playback, frame playback  
gives more detail during playback of still pictures.  
DISPLAY DIMMER CONTROL  
Set the brightness of the indication on the LCD.  
10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%  
97  
Setup Menu  
   
Menu items in the 100s, relating to the control panels  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
131  
AUDIO VOLUME  
Select whether each of the CH-1/ALL CH, CH-2 to CH-4 adjustment  
knobs on the control panel is effective to control the audio recording level  
and playback level on each channel or the CH-1/ALL CH adjustment  
knob alone functions as a master control to control the audio level on all  
channels together.  
each: Each of the CH-1/ALL CH, CH-2 to CH-4 adjustment knobs is  
effective to control each channel.  
all: The CH-1/ALL CH adjustment knob alone functions as a master  
control.  
When “all” is selected, the ALL CH indicator under the CH-1/ALL CH  
adjustment knob lights up.  
140  
142  
AREA MARKER  
REPEAT MODE  
Select whether to display the display area of SD output on the color LCD.  
off: Do not display.  
on: Display.  
Put the unit into repeat playback mode, or exit from repeat playback  
mode.  
off: Exits from repeat playback mode.  
play: Puts the unit into repeat playback mode.  
143  
INDEX PICTURE POSITION  
Select the frame of the clip to use as the thumbnail image (index picture)  
when recording.  
0sec to 10sec: Can be set in the range from 0 seconds (first frame of the  
clip) to10 seconds, in units of 1 second.  
Menu items in the 200s, relating to the remote control interface  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
201  
PARA RUN  
Select whether to use synchronized operation for two or more VTRs.  
dis (disable): No synchronized operationena  
ena (enable): Use synchronized operation  
Note  
To use synchronized operation for two or more VTRs, set item 201 to ena  
on all of the VTRs.  
214  
257  
REMOTE INTERFACE  
NETWORK ENABLE  
When the remote control switch is set to REMOTE, select the device from  
which to remote-control this unit.  
9PIN: Device connected to the REMOTE(9P) connector.  
SDI: Device connected to the HDSDI INPUT connector.  
Select the remote control switch positions which enable network  
connections.  
net (network): Only when the switch is set to “NET”.  
n&9P (network & remote(9PIN)): When the switch is set to “NET”, and  
when the switch is set to “REMOTE” and setup menu item 214 is set  
a)  
to “9PIN”.  
a) FTP connections can be made only when the device connected to the REMOTE(9P)  
connector (D-sub 9 pin) is in stop mode. During FTP connections, the device connected  
to the REMOTE(9P) connector cannot be used to control this unit.  
Menu items in the 300s, relating to editing operations  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
301  
VAR SPEED RANGE FOR  
SYNCHRONIZATION  
Select the playback speed range when carrying out playback in variable  
speed mode from a remote control unit connected to the REMOTE(9P)  
connector.  
2~+2: –2 to +2 times normal speed.  
wide: –2.20 to +2.20 times normal speed.  
320  
DIGITAL AUDIO PB PROCESS ON Select the treatment of audio playback at edit points.  
EDIT POINT  
cut: Carry out a cut (possibly resulting in audio discontinuities at the edit  
point).  
fade: Fade out and fade in.  
98  
Setup Menu  
       
Menu items in the 300s, relating to editing operations  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
344 ASSEMBLE AUTO EDIT  
POSTROLL RECORDING  
Set whether to record 2 seconds of postroll when an additional clip is  
recorded by sending the AUTO EDIT command (9-pin protocol 20·42)  
from a nonlinear editing system connected to the REMOTE(9P)  
connector on the rear panel.  
Note  
When using a linear editing system, postroll will not be recorded  
regardless of this setting.  
off: Do not record postroll.  
on: Records approximately 2 seconds of postroll.  
Menu items in the 400s, relating to preroll  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
401  
FUNCTION MODE AFTER CUE-UP Select the state that the unit goes into after a cuing-up operation.  
stop: Stops (the stop mode).  
still: Still playback (in jog and shuttle mode).  
Menu items in the 500s, relating to disc protection  
Item number Item name  
501 STILL TIMER  
Settings  
To protect the disc against shock and vibrations, and to lengthen the life  
of the laser diodes, the unit automatically enters standby off mode  
whenever a specified time elapses in a disc stop mode (stop mode or the  
still picture mode of search mode). This allows you to set the time after  
which the unit exits a disc stop mode and enters standby off mode.  
0.5 s (0.5 sec)... 8 m (8 min)... 30 m (30 min): Can be set in the range  
from 0.5 seconds to 30 minutes.  
off: Do not put into standby off mode.  
Menu items in the 600s, relating to the timecode, metadata, and UMID  
Item number Item name  
601 VITC POSITION In 59.94i mode  
SEL-1  
Settings  
Select the line into which to insert VITC signals (SD output)  
12H ... [16H] ... 20H: Any line from line 12 through line 20.  
Notes  
You can insert VITC signals in two places. To insert in two places, set  
both item 601 and item 602.  
• In 59.94i mode (J), output of wide picture information is given priority if  
OUTPUT in setup menu item 731 is set to “auto” and the VITC insertion  
line is set to line 16.  
• In 59.94i mode (UC), output of wide picture information is given priority  
if OUTPUT in setup menu item 731 is set to “auto” and the VITC  
insertion line is set to line 20.  
In 50i mode  
Select the line into which to insert VITC signals (SD output)  
9H ... [19H] ... 22H: Any line from line 9 through line 22.  
Note  
You can insert VITC signals in two places. To insert in two places, set  
both item 601 and item 602.  
99  
Setup Menu  
       
Menu items in the 600s, relating to the timecode, metadata, and UMID  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
602  
VITC POSITION In 59.94i mode  
SEL-2  
Select the line into which to insert VITC signals (SD output)  
12H ... [18H] ... 20H: Any line from line 12 through line 20.  
Notes  
You can insert VITC signals in two places. To insert in two places, set  
both item 601 and item 602.  
• In 59.94i mode (J), output of wide picture information is given priority if  
OUTPUT in setup menu item 731 is set to “auto” and the VITC insertion  
line is set to line 16.  
• In 59.94i mode (UC), output of wide picture information is given priority  
if OUTPUT in setup menu item 731 is set to “auto” and the VITC  
insertion line is set to line 20.  
In 50i mode  
Select the line into which to insert VITC signals (SD output)  
9H ... [21H] ... 22H: Any line from line 9 through line 22.  
Note  
You can insert VITC signals in two places. To insert in two places, set  
both item 601 and item 602.  
605  
607  
TCG REGEN MODE  
Select the signal to be regenerated when the timecode generator is in the  
regeneration mode.  
TC&UB: Both the timecode and user bits are regenerated.  
TC: Only the timecode is regenerated.  
UB: Only the user bits are regenerated.  
U-BIT BINARY GROUP FLAG  
Select the user bits to be used in the timecode generated by the  
timecode generator.  
000 (000:not specified): Character set not specified.  
001 (001:iso character): 8-bit characters compliant with ISO 646 and  
ISO 2022.  
010 (010:unassigned-1): Undefined.  
011 (011:unassigned-2): Undefined.  
100 (100:unassigned-3): Undefined.  
101 (101:page / line): SMPTE-262M page/line multiplex system.  
110 (110:unassigned-4): Undefined.  
111 (111:unassigned-5): Undefined.  
611  
TC OUTPUT PHASE IN EE MODE Select the timecode output mode for output from the TIME CODE OUT  
connector in E-E mode.  
thru (through): Output the timecode input to the TIME CODE IN  
connector as it is.  
v-in (video input phase): Output the timecode with the same phase as  
the input video signal phase.  
v-out (video output phase): Output the timecode with the same phase  
as the output video signal phase.  
612  
651  
TC OUTPUT MUTING IN SEARCH Select whether to suppress the output from the TIME CODE OUT  
MODE  
connector in jog/shuttle mode.  
on: Suppress.  
off: Do not suppress.  
UMID OUTPUT  
Select whether to output UMID in the VANC of the SDI output.  
off: Do not output.  
on: Output.  
See “Using UMID Data” (page 127) for more information about UMID.  
652  
UMID SD VANC LINE  
Select the line in which UMID is output when menu item 651 is set to  
“on”.  
12 H (12 line), 13 H (13 line), 15 H (15 line), 16 H (16 line), 17 H (17  
line), 18 H (18 line), 19 H (19 line) (59.94i mode)  
9 H (9 line), 10 H (10 line), 12 H (12 line), 13 H (13 line), 14 H (14 line),  
15 H (15 line), 16 H (16 line), 17 H (17 line), 18 H (18 line) (50i  
mode)  
See “Using UMID Data” (page 127) for more information about UMID.  
100  
Setup Menu  
Menu items in the 600s, relating to the timecode, metadata, and UMID  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
653  
UMID HD VANC LINE  
Specify the HD SDI signal VANC line into which the UMID should be  
inserted.  
9H to 17H to 20H  
Note  
The output VANC line during playback follows the setting for recording.  
See “Using UMID Data” (page 127) for more information about UMID.  
657  
660  
ESSENCE MARK SDI OUTPUT  
ESSENCE MARK SD VANC LINE  
Select whether to output essence marks in the SDI output VANC.  
off: Do not output.  
on: Output.  
When menu item 657 is set to “on”, select the line to which to output  
essence marks.  
12 H (12 line), 13 H (13 line), 15 H (15 line), 16 H (16 line), 17 H (17  
line), 18 H (18 line), 19 H (19 line) (59.94i mode)  
9 H (9 line), 10 H (10 line), 12 H (12 line), 13 H (13 line), 14 H (14 line),  
15 H (15 line), 16 H (16 line), 17 H (17 line), 18 H (18 line) (50i  
mode)  
665  
666  
ESSENCE MARK HD VANC LINE  
METADATA ITEM OUT  
When item 657 is set to “on”, select the line to which to output essence  
marks.  
9H to 17H to 20H  
Note  
The output VANC line during playback follows the setting for recording.  
Specify whether to include the information from recorded VANC packets  
in data items in the DATA ITEM section of MXF files.  
off: Do not include VANC packet information in data items.  
on: Include VANC packet information in data items.  
101  
Setup Menu  
Menu items in the 700s, relating to video control  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
703  
BLANK LINE SELECT  
Switch blanking of the video output signal on or off for individual lines in  
the vertical blanking interval.  
Sub-Item  
ALL LINE  
The Y/C signal and odd/even fields are blanked simultaneously.  
- - -: Specify the blanking for each line separately.  
blnk (blank): Regardless of the setting of other sub-items, blank all lines  
which can be specified in this menu item.  
thru (throu): Regardless of the setting of other sub-items, switch off  
blanking for all lines which can be specified in this menu item.  
In 59.94i  
mode (UC)  
LINE 12 ...  
LINE 19  
Specify blanking for lines 12 to 19.  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
LINE 20  
Specify blanking for line 20.  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
half: Carry out half-blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
In 59.94i  
mode (J)  
LINE 12 …  
LINE 20  
Specify blanking for lines 12 to 20.  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
LINE 21  
Specify blanking for line 21.  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
half: Carry out half-blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
In 50i mode  
LINE 9 ...  
LINE 22  
Specify blanking for lines 9 to 22.  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
LINE 23  
Specify blanking for line 23.  
half: Carry out half-blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
705  
707  
EDGE SUBCARRIER REDUCER Select whether to enable the edge subcarrier reducer (ESR).  
MODE  
on: Enable.  
off: Do not enable.  
When playing back a composite signal, set this to “on”.  
FORCED VERTICAL  
INTERPOLATION OFF  
The “Y-add” function is normally switched on automatically during jog or  
variable speed playback. This item selects whether to force the “Y-add”  
function off.  
auto: Automatically switch the “Y-add” function on.  
off (forced YADD off): Force the “Y-add” function off.  
The “Y-add” function is off while a disc image is displayed in stop mode  
(menu item 108 AUTO EE SELECT is “off”).  
The “Y-add” function is a circuit operation to interpolate the video signal  
vertically during jog or variable speed playback for the purpose of  
reducing the vertical movement of the playback picture.  
710  
INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL  
GENERATOR  
Select the test signal to be output from the internal test signal generator.  
When V INPUT on the P1 VIDEO page of the function menu is set to  
“SG”, the internal test signal generator operates to output the selected  
test signal. This signal can also be recorded.  
CB75 (75% Color Bars): 75% color bar signal  
CB100 (100% Color Bars): 100% color bar signal  
MLTBS (Multi Burst): Multi-burst signal  
10STEP (10 steps): 10-step signal  
PLSBR (Pulse and Bar): Pulse and bar signal  
RAMP (Ramp): Ramp signal  
BLACK (Black): Black signal  
ARIB CB (ARIB Color Bars): ARIB color bar signal, modify width, 100%  
102  
Setup Menu  
 
Menu items in the 700s, relating to video control  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
713  
VIDEO SETUP REFERENCE  
LEVEL  
Set the video setup amount to be added to the composite output signal (in  
59.94i mode only).  
Sub-item  
OUTPUT  
LEVEL  
In 59.94i mode  
(UC)  
Add the setup level selected by this item to the output signal.  
0.0%, 7.5%  
In 59.94i mode (J) Add the setup level selected by this item to the output signal.  
0.0%, 7.5%  
715  
716  
717  
718  
719  
720  
726  
VIDEO GAIN CONTROL  
Adjust the video output level.  
2048 to 0 to 848  
CHROMA GAIN CONTROL  
CHROMA PHASE CONTROL  
Adjust the chroma output level.  
2048 to 0 to 848  
Adjust the chroma phase.  
128 to 0 to 127  
SETUP LEVEL (59.94i mode)/  
BLACK LEVEL (50i mode)  
Adjust the setup level (black level).  
272 to 0 to 272  
SYSTEM PHASE SYNC  
SYSTEM PHASE SC  
H BLANKING WIDTH  
Adjust the output signal sync phase.  
128 to 0 to 127  
Adjust the output signal subcarrier phase.  
0 to 511  
Select the horizontal blanking width of the output analog video signal.  
narow (narrow): Digital blanking (narrow)  
wide: Analog blanking (wide)  
When “wide” is selected, the horizontal blanking width complies with  
RS170A, and normally the blanking is widened and the image becomes  
narrower. It is recommended to select “narow” at the editing stage, then  
later, for broadcast transmission to select “wide”, to output a signal  
conforming to the standard. Note, however, that “narow” has to be always  
selected for SDI signals.  
728  
731  
OUTPUT SCH PHASE  
Set the subcarrier H phase.  
–512 (–512 (DEC))... 0 (0 (DEC))... 511 (511 (DEC))  
Specify whether to record and play back with the addition of wide picture  
information.  
WIDE MODE  
Sub-Item  
OUTPUT  
Select whether to add wide picture information to the signal output when  
down-converter output is set to squeeze mode.  
thru (through): Do not add.  
auto: Add.  
Notes  
To add wide picture information to the output signal, another setting is  
required in addition to this item. In setup menu item 703, set line 16  
(59.94i mode (J)), line 20 (59.94i mode (UC)), or line 23(50i mode) to  
“thru”.  
• In 59.94i mode (J), output of wide picture information is given priority if  
the VITC insertion line is set to line 16 in setup menu item 601 or 602.  
• In 59.94i mode (UC), output of wide picture information is given priority  
if the VITC insertion line is set to line 20 in setup menu item 601 or 602.  
740  
MASTER LEVEL (HD)  
Adjust the high-definition video signal output from the HDSDI OUTPUT 1,  
2 (SUPER) connectors. This adjusts the Y, PB, and PR levels  
simultaneously.  
–2048 to 0 to 846  
741  
742  
Y LEVEL (HD)  
Adjust the Y level of the high-definition video signal output from the  
HDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER) connectors.  
–2048 to 0 to 846  
PB LEVEL (HD)  
Adjust the PB level of the high-definition video signal output from the  
HDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER) connectors.  
–2048 to 0 to 846  
103  
Setup Menu  
Menu items in the 700s, relating to video control  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
743  
745  
746  
747  
PR LEVEL (HD)  
Adjust the PR level of the high-definition video signal output from the  
HDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER) connectors.  
–2048 to 0 to 846  
SETUP LEVEL (HD)  
SYNC PHASE (HD)  
FINE (HD)  
Adjust the setup level of the high-definition video signal output from the  
HDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER) connectors.  
–272 to 0 to 272  
Control the H sync phase of the high-definition video signal output from  
the HDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER) connectors.  
–128 to 0 to 127  
Fine control the H sync phase of the high-definition video signal output  
from the HDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER) connectors.  
0 to 1023  
Menu items in the 800s, relating to audio control  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
802  
DIGITAL AUDIO MUTING IN  
SHUTTLE MODE  
Set the audio muting conditions during shuttle playback.  
off: Not muted.  
on: Muted.  
807  
AUDIO OUTPUT PHASE  
Set the output timing of digital audio playback signals (HDSDI, SDI, AES/  
EBU only), with 80H as a reference position. Output timing is earlier for  
values smaller than 80H and later for values greater than 80H. (80H, 128  
samples = approx. 2.7 ms, 80H, 1 sample = approx. 20 μs)  
0 (0 (HEX))... 80 (80 (HEX))... FF (FF (HEX)): Values can be set in this  
range.  
808  
INTERNAL AUDIO SIGNAL  
GENERATOR  
Select the operation of the internal audio test signal generator.  
silnc (silence): Silent signal.  
1kHz (1kHz sine): 1 kHz, –20 dB FS sine wave signal.  
When you select SG as the audio input in the input selection section of  
the control panel, the audio test signal generated by the internal audio  
test signal generator is input.  
815  
823  
AUDIO SAMPLING RATE  
CONVERTER  
Select the mode of operation of the sampling rate converter for AES/  
EBU input to channels 1 to 4.  
off: Do not operate.  
on: Operate.  
NON-AUDIO FLAG PB  
Sub-item  
Control non-audio flags in digital audio output.  
1
2
3
4
CH1/CH2  
CH3/CH4  
CH5/CH6  
CH7/CH8  
During playback (except E-E mode), set non-audio flags in digital audio  
output to the following states.  
on: Set to on (data is non-audio.)  
auto: Set as follows.  
• When data is read from disc and confirmed: Follow the data.  
• When data from disc is not confirmed: Maintain current state.  
824  
ANALOG LINE OUTPUT SELECT  
Select the analog audio signals (tracks 1 to 8) to be assigned to audio  
output channels 1 and 2.  
tr1/2: Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr3/4: Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr5/6: Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr7/8: Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
104  
Setup Menu  
   
Menu items in the 800s, relating to audio control  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
827  
AES/EBU AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT Select the audio signals to assign to AES/EBU audio output channels.  
Sub-item  
1
2
CH1/CH2  
CH3/CH4  
tr1/2: Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr3/4: Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr5/6: Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr7/8: Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr1/2: Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr3/4: Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr5/6: Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr7/8: Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
828  
SDI AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT  
Sub-item  
Select the audio signals to assign to SDI audio output channels.  
1
CH1/CH2  
tr1/2: Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr3/4: Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr5/6: Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr7/8: Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
2
CH3/CH4  
tr1/2: Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr3/4: Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr5/6: Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr7/8: Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
834  
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL  
Sub-item  
Select the analog audio input source.  
1
CH1  
line: Line input  
mic: Microphone input  
2
CH2  
line: Line input  
mic: Microphone input  
839  
840  
AUDIO AGC/LIMITER MODE  
AUDIO AGC SELECT  
For automatic input level adjustments performed on the analog audio  
signals recorded on channels 1 and 2, select whether to perform the  
adjustments in stereo mode or independently for channels 1 and 2.  
mono: Perform automatic adjustments independently for channels 1 and  
2.  
stereo: Perform automatic adjustments in stereo mode.  
Set the AGC saturation level.  
off: AGC does not operate.  
–6dB, –9dB, –12dB, –15dB, –17dB: AGC operates when the  
VARIABLE switch is set to PRESET.  
Note  
This setting is valid only for channels where “mic” is selected with setup  
menu item 834 AUDIO INPUT LEVEL. Regardless of this setting, AGC is  
“off” for channels where “line” is selected.  
841  
AUDIO LIMITER SELECT  
Select the limiter saturation level, for limiting large input signals, for use  
in manual adjustment of audio input levels.  
off: The limiter does not operate.  
–6dB, –9dB, –12dB, –15dB, –17dB: The limiter operates when the  
VARIABLE switch is set to PRESET.  
Note  
This setting is valid only for channels where “mic” is selected with setup  
menu item 834 AUDIO INPUT LEVEL. Regardless of this setting, the  
limiter is “off” for channels where “line” is selected.  
105  
Setup Menu  
   
Menu items in the 900s, relating to digital process  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
920  
SD-SDI H-ANC CONTROL  
Sub-item  
Select whether to add information to the SDI output.  
1
AUDIO 5CH-8CH  
off: Do not add digital audio data channels 5 to 8.  
on: Add digital audio data channels 5 to 8.  
2
RP188 ATC  
off: Do not add RP188 timecode data.  
on: Add RP188 timecode data.  
930  
931  
DOWN CONVERTER MODE (DC) Select the down-converter mode.  
CROP (EDGE CROP): Select the edge-crop mode.  
L-BOX (LETTER BOX): Select the letter box mode.  
SQUEZ (SQUEEZE): Select the squeeze mode.  
DOWN CONVERTER LETTER BOX Select the aspect ratio of the down-converter output when menu item  
MODE (DC)  
930 is set to “l-box”.  
16:9: Set the aspect ratio of the HD-SD converter output to 16:9.  
14:9: Set the aspect ratio of the HD-SD converter output to 14:9.  
13:9: Set the aspect ratio of the HD-SD converter output to 13:9.  
932  
H CROP POSITION (DC)  
Adjust the H-crop (the horizontal position when cropping in the edge crop  
mode) of the down converter output when menu item 930 is set to “crop”.  
–120 to 0 to 120  
934  
935  
CROSS COLOR (DC)  
DETAIL GAIN (DC)  
Adjust the down-converter cross color.  
0 to 8 to 15  
Adjust the down-converter image enhancer, the sharpness of edge  
emphasis.  
0 to 7FH  
936  
937  
938  
939  
940  
LIMITER (DC)  
Adjust the down-converter image enhancer, the maximum detail level  
added to emphasize the original signal.  
0 to 20H to 3FH  
CRISP THRESHOLD (DC)  
Adjust the down-converter image enhancer, the threshold amplitude at  
which low amplitude signals are not emphasized.  
0 to FH  
LEVEL DEPEND THRESHOLD  
(DC)  
Adjust the down-converter image enhancer. Set the luminance range for  
edge enhancement.  
0 to 8 to FH  
H DETAIL FREQUENCY (DC)  
H/V RATIO (DC)  
Adjust the down-converter image enhancer. Set the central frequency for  
edge enhancement.  
2.6MHz, 3.4MHz, 3.9MHz, 4.6MHz  
Adjust the down-converter image enhancer. Set the horizontal/vertical  
ratio for edge enhancement.  
0 to 3 to 7  
942  
943  
V FILTER SELECT  
Set the vertical interpolation filter coefficient for down-converter output.  
1 to 3  
CROSS COLOR CRISP  
Set the cross color crisp level for down-converter output.  
0 to 4 to FH  
1
Holding down the PAGE/HOME button and the  
SHIFT button, press the MENU button.  
Extended menu operations  
The extended menu can be used with the same procedures  
as in the basic menu.  
The maintenance menu appears on the video monitor  
display.  
However, since with the factory default settings the  
extended menu is not displayed, it is first necessary to  
enable display of the extended menu.  
To enable display of the extended menu  
Proceed as follows to use the maintenance menu.  
106  
Setup Menu  
         
MAINTENANCE MENU  
M0:CHECK  
M1:ADJUST  
p
M2:SERVICE SUPPORT  
M3:OTHERS  
M4:SETUP MAINENANCE  
M5:NETWORK  
M6:DRIVE  
2
3
4
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select “M4  
SETUP MAINTENANCE”, then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob or the SELECT function button  
(F2).  
The sub-items of M4: SETUP MAINTENANCE  
appears.  
MAINTENANCE MENU  
M4:SETUP MAINTENANCE  
PM40:EXTEND MENU: dis  
M40:CUSTOMIZE : dis  
M46:MENU DATA CONTROL  
M47:SETUP BANK4  
p
M48:AUTO RECALL: off  
M49:RESET ALL SETUP  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select “M40  
EXTENDED MENU”, then press the PUSH  
SET(S.SEL) knob or the SELECT function button  
(F2).  
The setting screen for M40: EXTENDED MENU  
appears.  
MAINTENANCE MENU  
M4:SETUP MAINTENANCE  
M40:EXTEND MENU: dis  
P
* DISABLE  
ENABLE  
p
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select  
“ENABLE”, and press the SAVE function button (F5).  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears on the video  
monitor display, and “Saving...” appears in the time  
data display area, while the new settings are saved in  
memory. When the saving operation is completed, the  
video monitor display and the time data display area  
return to their normal indications.  
When you next display the menu and change the item  
display, the extended menu will appear after the basic  
menu.  
107  
Setup Menu  
Maintenance Menu  
Items in the maintenance menu  
The following tables show the items in the maintenance  
menu.  
this case, the external monitor values are shown in  
parentheses.) Underlined values are the factory defaults.  
• Item names are the names which appear on the video  
monitor of this unit and an external monitor to which the  
output of the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 (SUPER)  
connector, the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector,  
or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 (SUPER) connector is input.  
An abbreviated name appears in the time data display  
area when you press the NEXT button.  
• The values in the Settings columns are the values which  
appear in the time data display area. (The values may  
appear in a different format on an external monitor. In  
This manual does not explain the menu items in M0:  
CHECK, M1: ADJUST, M2: SERVICE SUPPORT, and  
M6: DRIVE. Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an  
explanation of these items.  
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for more detailed  
information about the menu items in M3:OTHERS,  
M4:SETUP MAINTENANCE, and M5:NETWORK.  
M3: OTHERS: Other setting items  
Setting  
Item  
M30: SOFTWARE VERSION  
M31: SERIAL NUMBER  
M36: HOURS METER RESET  
Display of the software version of this unit  
Display and correction of the serial number of this unit  
Display and reset of the hours meter and the thread counter  
M37: AUDIO  
CONFIG  
M370: METER HEAD  
ROOM  
Select the audio reference level (headroom).  
20dB, 18dB, 16dB, 12dB, EBUL  
Note  
EBUL can be selected only when the system frequency is 50i.  
M372: NON-AUDIO  
INPUT  
Select whether to handle digital audio signals as non-audio signals during  
recording.  
Audio (audio): Handle as linear PCM audio signals.  
data: Handle as non-audio signals.  
Sub-Item  
1 Tr1/Tr2  
2 Tr3/Tr4  
3 Tr5/Tr6  
4 Tr7/Tr8  
M373: INPUT LEVEL  
Sub-Item  
Set the upper limit for the signal level input to audio channels 1/3 or 2/4.  
+4dB, 0dB, –3dB, –6dB, EBUL  
1 CH1/CH2  
2 CH3/CH4  
M377: OUTPUT LEVEL  
Note  
EBUL can be selected only when the system frequency is 50i.  
Set the reference level for audio output signals.  
+4dB, 0dB, –3dB, –6dB, EBUL  
Note  
EBUL can be selected only when the system frequency is 50i.  
M38: F-KEY  
CONFIG  
M380: HOME2  
Assign a function menu item to page HOME2 of the function menu as a user  
setting.  
M381: PAGE7 ASSIGN  
M382: PAGE7 NAME  
Assign a setup menu item to page P7 of the function menu as a user setting.  
Specify the name of a setup menu item assigned with M381: PAGE7 ASSIGN.  
Save the settings of M380 to M382.  
M38F: NV-RAM  
CONTROL  
108  
Maintenance Menu  
           
M3: OTHERS: Other setting items  
Setting  
Item  
M3B: VANC RX M3BD: HD VANC INPUT For setting HD SDI ANC data input parameters  
PARAMETER  
LINE  
Specification of the HDSDI line number that contains the V-ANC data that you  
want to receive  
OFF, 9LINE to 20LINE  
DID  
SDID  
Specification of the DID of the V-ANC that you want to receive  
00h-FFh  
Specification of the SDID of the V-ANC that you want to receive  
00h-FFh  
M3C: POWER SAVE CONTROL  
Specification of whether to enable the power saving function  
OFF, ON  
M3D: DATE/TIME PRESET  
M3E: USB MEMORY UTIL  
Specification of the date and time  
For installation of software upgrade  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
M3F: FACTORY SETUP  
M4: SETUP MAINTENANCE: items relating to the setup menu  
Setting  
Item  
M40: EXTENDED MENU  
Select whether to display the extended menu.  
DISABLE: Do not display.  
ENABLE: Display.  
M41: CUSTOMIZE  
Select whether to enable the customization function of the setup menu.  
DISABLE: Do not display.  
ENABLE: Display.  
M46: MENU  
DATA  
CONTROL  
M461: MENU  
STATUS  
DISPLAY  
Displays the status of the menu bank where the current menu settings are stored.  
M462: SAVE  
MENU DATA  
Select whether to temporarily back up (save) setup menu settings before operations such as  
software upgrades.  
PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob: Back up (save) the settings.  
MENU button: Return to next highest menu level without backing up.  
M463: LOAD  
MENU DATA  
Select whether to restore (load) setting that were backed up (saved) with the “SAVE MENU  
DATA” item.  
PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob: Restore (load) the settings.  
MENU button: Return to the next highest menu level without restoring.  
M47: SETUP BANK4  
Select the bank to be stored in menu bank 4, or reset menu bank 4.  
CURRENT TO BANK4: Store the current menu settings in menu bank 4.  
BANK1 TO BANK4: Store the menu bank 1 settings in menu bank 4.  
BANK2 TO BANK4: Store the menu bank 2 settings in menu bank 4.  
BANK3 TO BANK4: Store the menu bank 3 settings in menu bank 4.  
RESET BANK4: Reset menu bank 4.  
M48: AUTO BANK RECALL  
Select whether to recall settings automatically from a menu bank when the system is  
powered on, and if so which menu bank to recall from.  
off: Do not recall settings from a menu bank.  
from BANK1: Recall settings from menu bank 1.  
from BANK2: Recall settings from menu bank 2.  
from BANK3: Recall settings from menu bank 3.  
from BANK4: Recall settings from menu bank 4.  
109  
Maintenance Menu  
M4: SETUP MAINTENANCE: items relating to the setup menu  
Setting  
Item  
M49: RESET ALL SETUP  
Reset the current menu settings to the factory settings.  
PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob: Reset.  
MENU button: Return to the next highest menu level without resetting.  
Notes  
• The system frequency setting is also cleared. If you execute this item, reset the system  
• Date and time settings are not cleared, but the time zone setting is cleared. After executing  
this item, reset the time zone (see page 25).  
M5: NETWORK: items relating to network settings  
Setting  
Item  
M50: DHCP  
Set whether to assign an IP address automatically with the DHCP server.  
DISABLE: Do not assign automatically.  
ENABLE: Assign automatically.  
M51: IP ADDRESS PRESET  
Set IP address.  
192.168.001.010  
Note  
When DHCP is set to “ENABLE”, it is not possible to set the IP address.  
M52: SUBNET MASK PRESET Set the subnet mask.  
255.255.255.000  
Note  
When DHCP is set to “ENABLE”, it is not possible to set the subnet mask.  
M53: DEFAULT GATEWAY  
PRESET  
Set the default gateway.  
000.000.000.000  
Note  
When DHCP is set to “ENABLE”, it is not possible to set the default gateway.  
M54: LINK SPEED  
M55: DUPLEX  
Set the communications speed.  
AUTO, 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps  
Set the communications method.  
AUTO, Full Duplex, Half Duplex  
For how to set the communication method, see “To change network settings” (page 111).  
a)  
Sets the size of jumbo frames.  
9014, 4088, OFF(1514)  
M56: JUMBO FRAME  
Note  
This value does not include the 4 bytes of the FCS (Frame Check Sequence).  
a) A jumbo frame is a frame larger than the maximum 1514 bytes (not  
including FCS) of the standard Ethernet frame. Jumbo frames make it  
possible to deliver larger payloads per packet. Since fewer packets need to  
be routed, packet processing overhead is lower and network throughput is  
potentially improved. (Note that this item is enabled only when LINK  
SPEED is set to “1000Mbps”. For it to work, all other devices that handle  
packets on the network must also support jumbo frames.)  
To display the maintenance menu  
Holding down the PAGE/HOME button and the SHIFT  
button, press the MENU button.  
The maintenance menu appears on the video monitor  
display and the currently-set menu item is displayed in  
reverse video.  
Maintenance menu operations  
This section describes the indications in the maintenance  
menu and how to change the settings.  
110  
Maintenance Menu  
     
3
4
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob or the SELECT  
function button (F2) to confirm the setting change.  
Meanings of indications on the menu  
screen  
Press the SAVE function button (F5).  
On-screen indication Meaning  
Right-pointing arrow  
(c) at the right of a  
menu item  
Pressing the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
knob or the b/OUT button switches  
to the next lower menu level or to a  
setting selection screen.  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears on the video  
monitor display, and “Saving...” appears in the time  
data display area, while the new settings are saved in  
memory. When the saving operation is completed, the  
video monitor display and the time data display area  
return to their normal indications.  
Left-pointing arrow (C) Pressing the PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
at the left of a menu  
item  
knob or the B/IN button switches to  
the previous (higher) menu level.  
Character string at the Current setting of the menu item  
To cancel changing a setting  
Before pressing the SAVE function button (F5), press the  
MENU button.  
The menu disappears from the video monitor display,  
without saving the new setting.  
right of a menu item  
When shown with a colon (:): the  
current setting is the same as  
the factory default setting.  
When shown with a raised dot  
(.): the current setting is  
different from the factory  
default setting.  
To change network settings  
An * (asterisk) in a  
complete list of settings  
Factory default setting  
To change network settings, carry out the procedure  
described in the previous section, “To display the  
maintenance menu”, to display the NETWORK menu  
item, then carry out the following operations.  
To change a menu item setting  
Carry out the following operations to change the setting.  
For details of the settings, consult your network  
administrator.  
For information about how to change network settings see  
next section “To change network settings”.  
When the IP address is assigned automatically  
Arrow buttons  
PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob  
Function buttons  
Note  
Check that the network cable is connected to this unit  
before carrying out the operation.  
EJECT  
Follow the procedure as shown in previous section “To  
change a menu item setting” to set maintenance menu item  
M5: NETWORK >M50: DHCP to “ENABLE”.  
MARK1  
PUSH SET(S.SEL)  
ACCESS  
IN  
OUT  
CH-1  
CH-3  
CH-4  
MENU  
MARK2  
SHTL/JOG  
ALL CH  
VAR/JOG  
CH-2  
RESET  
CHAPTER  
EXPAND  
RETURN  
VARIABLE KEY INHI  
To check the assigned IP address  
Select maintenance menu item M5: NETWORK  
>M51: IP ADDRESS PRESET.  
REC  
PAGE  
NET  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
PRE-  
SET  
OFF  
PB  
HOME  
PHONES  
LEVEL  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
DISPLAY  
SHIFT  
THUMBNAIL  
SUB CLIP  
DISC MENU  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
STANDBY REC INHI  
SHIFT button  
PAGE/HOME button  
Note  
If the IP address cannot be assigned, this is shown as  
“000.000.000.000.” In this case, consult the network  
administrator.  
MENU button  
1
2
Use the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob or the V/MARK1  
and v/MARK2 buttons to select the required item,  
then press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob or the  
SELECT function button (F2).  
To set the IP address  
First set DHCP to “DISABLE” (see the previous section,  
“When the IP address is assigned automatically”).  
The sub-items of the selected item appears.  
1
2
Select maintenance menu item M5: NETWORK  
>M51: IP ADDRESS PRESET.  
Select a sub-item with the same operation as step 1,  
and use the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob or the V/MARK1  
and v/MARK2 buttons to change the setting.  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The IP address appears, and the digit that can be  
changed flashes.  
111  
Maintenance Menu  
             
3
4
Set the IP address.  
To return to the factory default setting  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
To select a different digit to be changed  
Use the B/IN and b/OUT buttons.  
4
Press the SAVE function button (F5).  
This returns to the NETWORK menu.  
To change the value of a digit  
Turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
Turning clockwise increases the value, and turning  
counterclockwise decreases the value.  
The V/MARK1 and v/MARK2 buttons can be used.  
To set the communications protocol  
1
2
Select maintenance menu item M5: NETWORK  
>M55: DUPLEX.  
To return to the factory default setting  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The communications protocols (AUTO, Full Duplex,  
Half Duplex) appear, and the arrow flashes.  
When all digits are set, press the SAVE function  
button (F5).  
3
4
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob or use the V/  
MARK1 or v/MARK2 button to select a  
communications protocol.  
This returns to the NETWORK menu.  
5
6
7
Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required, to set the subnet mask  
and default gateway.  
To return to the factory default setting  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
In the NETWORK menu, press the SAVE function  
button (F5).  
Press the SAVE function button (F5).  
This returns to the NETWORK menu.  
When the “NOW SAVING...” message vanishes,  
power the unit off and then on again with the on/  
standby button.  
To set the communications speed and  
protocol  
Set the communications speed (LINK SPEED) and  
communications method (DUPLEX) to match the network  
environment.  
To set the communications speed and communications  
protocol, proceed as explained in the previous section “To  
display the maintenance menu” to display the NETWORK  
menu and then proceed as follows.  
Contact your network administrator if you have any  
questions about the proper settings for these items.  
To set the communications speed  
1
2
Select maintenance menu item M5: NETWORK  
>M54: LINK SPEED.  
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob.  
The communications speeds (AUTO, 10Mbps,  
100Mbps, and 1000Mbps) appear, and the arrow  
flashes.  
3
Press the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob or use the v/  
MARK1 or V/MARK2 button to select a  
communications speed.  
112  
Maintenance Menu  
   
Appendix  
temperature inside a car with the windows closed can  
easily exceed 50°C (122°F).  
• In damp or dusty locations  
• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain  
• Locations subject to violent vibration  
• Near strong magnetic fields  
Important Notes on  
Operation  
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong  
electromagnetic fields.  
Use and storage  
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods  
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks  
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body  
warped.  
To prevent electromagnetic interference from  
portable communications devices  
The use of portable telephones and other communications  
devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and  
interference with audio and video signals.  
Do not cover the unit while operating  
Doing so will cause temperatures to rise inside the unit,  
possibly resulting in failure.  
It is recommended that the portable communications  
devices near this unit be powered off.  
After use  
Turn off the on/standby button.  
If you plan not to use the unit for a long time, turn off the  
POWER switch on the rear panel as well.  
Condensation  
Shipping  
If you move the unit from a very cold place to a warm  
place, or use it in a damp location, condensation may form  
on the optical pickup. Then, if the unit is operated in this  
state, recording and playback may not be performed  
properly.  
Do the following to prevent this from happening.  
• When you move or operate the unit in an environment  
where condensation may form, be sure to insert a disc in  
advance.  
• Whenever you turn on the on/standby button, check that  
the HUMID indicator does not appear on the color LCD.  
If it appears, wait until it disappears before inserting a  
disc.  
• Remove the disc before transporting the unit.  
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other  
transportation service, pack it in the shipping carton of  
the unit.  
Care of the unit  
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft, dry cloth.  
In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in a little neutral  
detergent, then wipe dry. Do not use organic solvents such  
as alcohol or thinners, as these may cause discoloration or  
other damage to the finish of the unit.  
In the event of operating problems  
If you should experience problems with the unit, contact a  
Sony service representative.  
About the LCD panel  
Use and storage locations  
LCD panels are manufactured with extremely high  
precision technology that yields effective pixel rates of  
99.99% or higher. However, very rarely, one or more  
pixels may be permanently dark or permanently lit in  
white, red, blue, or green.  
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the  
unit in the following places.  
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature range:  
5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F))  
Remember that in summer or in warm climates the  
113  
Important Notes on Operation  
           
This phenomenon is not a malfunction. Such pixels have  
no effect on the recorded data, and the unit may be used  
with confidence even if they are present.  
Periodic Maintenance  
Digital hours meter  
The digital hours meter can provide eight items of  
information about the operational history of the unit. The  
information can be displayed in the time data display area  
and also, by text superimposition, on the monitor  
connected to the unit. Use the information as a guide in  
scheduling periodic maintenance.  
For periodic maintenance, consult a Sony service  
representative.  
Display modes of the digital hours meter  
H01: OPERATION mode  
Displays the total number of hours the unit has been  
powered on in units of 1 hour.  
H02: LASER PARAMETER 0 mode (not  
resettable)  
Of the two optical heads, this shows a counter of the  
cumulative light output time by one optical head in units of  
1)  
hours.  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  
the optical head.  
1) The counter advances at different rates during recording and playback. It  
is also affected by the ambient temperature.  
H03: LASER PARAMETER 1 mode (not  
resettable)  
Same as H02.  
Of the two optical heads, this shows a counter of the  
cumulative light output time by the other optical head in  
1)  
units of hours.  
1) The counter advances at different rates during recording and playback. It  
is also affected by the ambient temperature.  
H11: OPERATION mode (resettable)  
Same as H01 except that the count is resettable.  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  
parts.  
H13: SEEK RUNNING 0 mode (resettable)  
Of the two optical heads, this shows the cumulative seek  
operation time for one optical head in units of hours. The  
count is resettable.  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  
the seek motor.  
H14: SPINDLE RUNNING mode (resettable)  
This shows the cumulative spindle rotation time, in units of  
hours. The count is resettable.  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  
the spindle motor.  
114  
Periodic Maintenance  
             
H15: LOADING COUNTER mode (resettable)  
Display the total number of times disc has been loaded in  
the unit. The count is resettable.  
H17: SEEK RUNNING 1 mode (resettable)  
Same as H13.  
Of the two optical heads, this shows the cumulative seek  
operation time for the other optical head in units of hours.  
The count is resettable.  
To display the digital hours meter  
Press the MENU button to display the setup menu, then  
turn the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to display the required  
item in the time data display area and on the monitor  
connected to the unit.  
To exit from the digital hours meter  
Press the RETURN function button (F1) to return to the  
setup menu.  
Press the EXIT function button (F5) to return to the screen  
that was displayed before you entered the setup menu.  
115  
Periodic Maintenance  
   
Troubleshooting  
Alarms  
An alarm (warning message) appears in the time data  
display area when an operation is attempted which is  
inappropriate for the settings on this unit or the state of the  
disc. Both the alarm message and the action to take to  
resolve the problem appear in the monitor video section  
and on the screen of the external video monitor connected  
to the unit.  
R E M O T E !  
Example alarm in time data display area  
ALARM  
REMOTE MODE IS SELECTED.  
SET REMOTE/LOCAL/NETWORK  
SWITCH TO LOCAL.  
Example alarm in monitor video section  
When an alarm is displayed, remove the alarm cause by  
following the action to take. If the alarm display does not  
disappear, contact a Sony service representative.  
Please note that there are some alarms which do not appear  
depending on the setting of setup menu item 016 ALARM  
DISPLAY (see page 93).  
See “Setup Menu” (page 90) for more information about  
setup menu operations.  
When the unit is powered on  
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor screen  
Description/action  
ADJ. Mode!  
MENU Ver.UP  
ILL. SETUP!  
THE UNIT IS IN ADJUSTMENT MODE.  
This appears when the unit is in adjustment  
mode.  
Contact a Sony service representative.  
CHECK THE SWITCHES OF S2701 ON THE  
HPR-23 BOARD AND S1 ON THE VPR-99  
BOARD.  
THE SETUP MENU SOFTWARE HAS BEEN  
UPGRADED.  
SET THE SETUP MENU ITEMS TO THE  
DESIRED SETTINGS.  
Reset the settings in the setup menu (see  
INVALID SETTINGS SELECTED IN SETUP  
MENU.  
SET ITEMS IN THE SETUP MENU TO THE  
Reset the settings in the setup menu (see  
page 96). If the same message appears after  
you reset the settings, contact a Sony service  
APPROPRIATE VALUES. CONTACT SERVICE representative.  
IF THIS ALARM APPEARS AGAIN AFTER  
ABOVE PROCEDURE.  
Exchg batt!  
Update Err!  
BATTERY NEEDS REPLACING. PLEASE  
CONTACT SERVICE.  
The NVRAM battery is exhausted. Contact a  
Sony service representative.  
The software version is not properly updated.  
RUN SOFTWARE UPDATE PROGRAM.  
The software version is not properly updated.  
Update the software version again. If the same  
message appears after you update the software  
version, contact a Sony service representative.  
116  
Troubleshooting  
         
When a disc is inserted  
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor screen Description/action  
Unknown FS!  
UNKNOWN FILE SYSTEM.  
PLEASE FORMAT DISC OR EJECT.  
Format the disc, or eject it (see page 72).  
No FS!  
NO FILE SYSTEM.PLEASE EJECT DISC. Eject the disc.  
ILL. Disc!  
IRREGULAR DISC IS USED.  
USE PROFESSIONAL DISC.  
Use a Professional Disc.  
IRREGULAR DISC IS USED.  
PLEASE EJECT DISC.  
Salvage NG!  
Salvage XXXX  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED.  
FORMAT DISC OR CONTACT SERVICE normally (salvage functions)” (page 47).  
See “Handling of discs when recording does not end  
TO RUN CLIP SALVAGE PROGRAM.  
(XXXX)  
Over DUR!  
EXCESSIVE DURATION IS IN DISC.  
RECORDING AND PLAYBACK IS NOT  
POSSIBLE.  
Data in excess of the rated capacity is recorded on  
the disc.  
No Support!  
FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED.  
RECORDING AND PLAYBACK IS NOT  
POSSIBLE.  
A disc in an unsupported recording format is loaded.  
Use a disc formatted in the MPEG HD422 format.  
ILL. Index!  
INDEX FILE ERROR.  
PLEASE FORMAT DISC OR EJECT.  
Format the disc, or eject it (see page 72).  
Formatting!  
FORMAT NG!  
AUTO FORMATTING IS EXECUTING.  
Wait until the format has been completed and try  
again.  
AUTO FORMATTING WAS NOT  
COMPLETED.  
Eject the disc and insert it again, or insert another  
disc.  
DI read err  
Read err  
CANNOT READ DISC INFORMATION.  
PLEASE EJECT DISC.  
DRV ADJ err  
CANNOT PERFORM AUTO DRIVE  
ADJUSTMENT.  
During front panel operations  
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor screen Description/action  
a)  
KEY INHIBIT MODE IS SELECTED.  
SET KEY INHIBIT SWITCH TO OFF.  
This appears when the KEY INHI switch is “on”.  
Set the KEY INHI switch “off”.  
KEY INHI.!  
a)  
REMOTE MODE IS SELECTED.  
SET REMOTE/LOCAL/NETWORK  
SWITCH TO LOCAL.  
Set the remote control switch to “LOCAL.  
REMOTE!  
a)  
NO DISC.  
Insert a disc and try again.  
No Disc!  
117  
Troubleshooting  
 
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor screen Description/action  
REC INHI.!  
AUTO FORMATTING WAS NOT  
COMPLETED.  
Set the disc’s Write Inhibit tab to enable recording  
THE DISC WRITE PROTECT TAB IS SET  
TO SAVE.  
PLEASE EJECT DISC.  
THE DISC WRITE PROTECT TAB IS SET  
TO SAVE.  
AUTO FORMATTING WAS NOT  
COMPLETED.  
REC INHIBIT MODE IS SELECTED.  
CHECK FUNCTION MENU.  
PLEASE EJECT DISC.  
This appears when REC INH on the HOME page of  
the function menu is set to “ON”.  
Set REC INH to “OFF” (see page 40).  
REC INHIBIT.  
This appears if you press the REC button when a disc  
error has occurred. Correct the disc error and try  
again.  
b)  
NO CLIP.  
This appears when a playback, search or delete  
operation is attempted on a disc with no clips  
recorded on it.  
No Clip!  
Insert a disc with clips recorded on it.  
a)  
DISC TOP.  
DISC END.  
This appears if you press the PREV button or conduct  
a high-speed reverse search when the unit is stopped  
at the start of the disc.  
Disc Top!  
Use forward search or playback instead.  
a)  
This appears if you press the NEXT button or conduct  
a forward high-speed search when the unit is stopped  
at the end of the disc.  
Disc End!  
Use reverse search or playback instead.  
MAX # Clips  
MAX # Files  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.  
FOR MORE RECORDING, DELETE  
SOME CLIPS.  
Delete unneeded clips, or insert a disc with enough  
free space.  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.  
FOR MORE RECORDING SPACE,  
DELETE CLIPS OR NON-AV DATA.  
(GENERAL FILES)  
Delete clips or GENERAL files.  
Disc Full!  
DISC FULL.FOR MORE RECORDING,  
DELETE SOME CLIPS.  
Delete unneeded clips, or insert a disc with enough  
free space.  
b)  
NO MORE SUB CLIPS CAN BE ADDED This appears when an attempt is made to add sub  
MAX# SB CLP  
TO CLIP LIST.  
clips when 300 sub clips have already been  
registered.  
Limit the creation of sub clips to 300 or fewer.  
b)  
DURATION OF ONE CLIP LIST MUST BE This appears when you try to add a sub clip when the  
CL OVER DUR  
LESS THAN 24 HOURS.  
total duration of sub clips in a clip list has already  
reached 24 hours.  
Create clip lists so that the total duration is within 24  
hours.  
Run Salvage  
EXECUTE SALVAGE PROGRAM.  
This appears when recording, E-E display, essence  
mark recording, or sub clip addition for quick scene  
selection is attempted on a disc that needs to be  
salvaged.  
Try again after salvaging the clips on the disc (see  
a)  
COUNTER MODE IS SELECTED.  
SET COUNTER SELECT MENU TO TC  
OR UB.  
This appears when CNTR SEL on the HOME page of  
the function menu is set to “COUNTER”, and you try  
to preset timecode or user bits.  
CNT mode!  
To use timecode or user bits, set CNTR SEL to “TC”  
or “UB” (see page 40).  
118  
Troubleshooting  
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor screen Description/action  
b)  
TC EXTERNAL IS SELECTED.  
SET TC INTERNAL MODE IN FUNCTION function menu is set to “EXT”, and you try to preset  
This appears when TCG on page P4 TC of the  
TC EXT!  
MENU.  
timecode or user bits by setting PRST/RGN to  
“PRESET”.  
Set TCG to “INT” (see page 41).  
a)  
TCG REGEN MODE IS SELECTED.  
SET TC PRESET MODE IN FUNCTION  
MENU.  
This appears when PRST/RGN on page P4 TC of the  
function menu is set to “TC” or “VITC”, and you try to  
preset timecode or user bits.  
REGEN mode!  
Set PRST/RGN to “PRESET” (see page 41).  
a)  
TCG RUN MODE IS SET TO REC RUN.  
SET TC FREE RUN MODE IN FUNCTION the function menu is set to “REC RUN”, and you try to  
This appears when RUN MODE on page P4 TC of  
REC RUN!  
MENU.  
preset timecode or user bits.  
Set RUN MODE to “FREE RUN” (see page 41).  
b)  
THUMBNAIL(S) CANNOT BE  
DISPLAYED DURING RECORDING.  
Stop recording and try again.  
REC mode!  
CANNOT EXECUTE IN REC MODE.  
DRIVE MAINTENANCE MENU CANNOT  
BE EXECUTED WHILE IN REC MODE.  
INPUT SELECTION CANNOT BE  
CHANGED DURING RECORDING.  
AUDIO REC MODE CANNOT BE  
CHANGED DURING RECORDING.  
REC-PAUSE!  
TC/UB CANNOT BE PRESET IN REC-  
PAUSE MODE.  
Stop recording and try again.  
b)  
CLIP LIST IS NOT SELECTED.  
This appears when you press the SUB CLIP/  
DISC MENU button while the clip list on the disc is  
not loaded into the current clip list.  
No SEL List  
Load the clip list (see page 66) and try again.  
b)  
TO ADD AN ESSENCE MARK, EXIT  
FROM SUB CLIP MODE FIRST.  
This appears when you perform essence mark  
operations with the SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button lit.  
Try again after pressing the SUB CLIP/DISC MENU  
button to turn it off.  
SB CLP mode  
b)  
SUB CLIP IS INVALID.  
SET APPROPRIATE IN/OUT POINTS.  
Set the In and Out points again.  
SUB CLIP NG  
b)  
NO CLIP LIST.  
This appears when you try to delete a clip list when  
there is no clip list saved on the disc.  
Load the disc that contains the clip list you want to  
delete.  
No List!  
Loading List!  
LOADING CLIP LIST.  
This appears if the SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button is  
pressed while a clip list is loading.Wait for the clip list  
to finish loading and try again.  
b)  
STOP ONCE, THEN EXECUTE.  
This appears when you press the SUB CLIP/DISC  
MENU button during clip list playback.  
Stop the playback and try again.  
STOP ONCE!  
No EM space  
ESSENCE MARK NOT RECORDED.  
NO SPACE AVAILABLE TO RECORD  
ESSENCE MARK.  
Use the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software to delete  
unneeded essence marks.  
Or, delete unneeded shot marks in the chapter  
thumbnail screen.  
EM Full!  
NO MORE ESSENCE MARKS CAN BE  
RECORDED.  
Disc Damage  
NON-AV Full  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.  
USE ANOTHER DISC FOR RECORDING.  
Use another disc.  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.  
FOR MORE RECORDING SPACE,  
DELETE NON-AV DATA. (GENERAL  
FILES)  
Delete unneeded GENERAL files.  
119  
Troubleshooting  
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor screen Description/action  
Index File!  
UNSUPPORT INDEX FILE.  
DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO.  
Use another disc.  
File System  
CURRENT VERSION OF THE  
SOFTWARE SETS THE DISC WRITE  
PROTECTED.  
This appears when you insert a disc that can be  
played back but not recorded.  
Exchange the disc for one with a file system  
supported by this unit. Or format the disc (see  
FILE SYSTEM ON THE DISC INHIBITS  
WRITING.  
a)  
LOADING.  
This appears if you press a button while a disc is  
loading. Wait until the disc has finished loading and  
try again.  
Loading!  
a)  
UNLOADING.  
This appears if you press a button while a disc is  
unloading.  
Unloading!  
Wait until the disc has finished unloading and try  
again.  
Clip lock!  
CLIP IS LOCKED.  
UNLOCK CLIP IN THUMBNAIL MENU.  
This appears when an operation is attempted on a  
locked clip.Use the Thumbnail Menu to unlock the clip  
(see page 63) and try again.  
a) Displayed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to  
“on”.  
b) Displayed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to  
“on” or “limit”.  
During recording and editing operations  
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor screen Description/action  
a)  
INPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCY IS NOT  
THE SAME AS THE SYSTEM SETUP.  
This appears when an input signal does not match  
the system frequency of this unit.  
Input Sig!”  
Input a signal that matches the system frequency, or  
change this unit’s system frequency setting (see  
a)  
ENCODING DOES NOT SYNCHRONIZE Check the signals being input to this unit.  
WITH REF VIDEO.  
ILL. REC!  
a)  
INPUT VIDEO SIGNAL DOES NOT  
SYNCHRONIZE WITH REF VIDEO  
SIGNAL.  
Input a reference signal synchronized with this unit’s  
system frequency.  
ILL. REF!  
USE COMMON REFERENCE SIGNAL  
OR CONNECT RECORDER REF OUT TO  
PLAYER REF IN.  
a)  
MEMORY FULL !!  
Check the disc being recorded by this unit.  
Wait for recording to finish.  
MEM. Full!  
Recording  
NOW RECORDING ...  
a) Displayed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to  
“on” or “limit”.  
During playback  
Alarm message in time data  
display section  
Alarm message in monitor video  
section  
Description/action  
a)  
ILLEGAL PLAYBACK.  
Check the disc being played by this unit.  
Check the disc being played by this unit.  
Use another disc.  
ILL. PLAY!  
a)  
MEMORY EMPTY !!  
MEM. Empty!  
Disc Error!  
DISC ERROR DETECTED.  
a) Displayed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to  
“on” or “limit”.  
120  
Troubleshooting  
During thumbnail search, scene selection, and clip list operations  
Alarm message in GUI  
screen  
Description/action  
Cannot Expand Clip any  
Further.  
The clip cannot be expanded into more blocks.  
This appears when the EXPAND button is pressed when the number of block is maximum, or  
when the duration of an expanded thumbnail is 1 frame.  
Selected Essence Mark does The selected essence mark does not exist.  
not Exist.  
This appears in the essence mark selection screen when the specified essence mark does not  
exist on the disc.  
Sub Clip is Invalid.  
Set Appropriate IN/OUT  
Points.  
The temporal relationship between the specified In and Out points in sub clip trimming is not  
correct.  
Reset so that the value of the Out point timecode is larger than the value of the In point  
timecode.  
Duration of One Clip List  
The total duration of the current clip list is greater than 24 hours.  
must be Less than 24 Hours. This appears when the total duration of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 24 hours as  
the result of adding or trimming sub clups.  
No More Sub Clips can be  
Added to the Clip List.  
The upper limit of sub clips in the current clip list has been reached.  
This appears when the upper limit of 300 clips in a clip list has been reached as the result of  
adding or trimming sub clips.  
Sub Clip does not Exist.  
Clip List does not Exist.  
There are no sub clips in the current clip list.  
This appears when an attempt is made to move, trim or delete sub clips or preset timecode.  
There are no clip lists on the disc.  
This appears when an attempt is made to execute a Delete Clip List operation when there are no  
clip lists on the disc.  
Move is Invalid.  
The sub clip cannot be moved.  
This appear when an attempt is made to execute a Move Sub Clips operation when there are no  
sub clip in the current clip list, or when there is only one sub clip.  
Chapter does not Exist.  
The specified chapter has not been recorded.  
This appears when an attempt is made to display a chapter when a chapter has not been  
recorded for that clip.  
Rec Start cannot be Deleted. The Rec Start essence mark cannot be deleted.  
This appears when an attempt is made to delete a Rec Start with a Delete Shot Mark operation.  
Delete Shot Mark can delete only Shot Mark1 and Shot Mark2 marks.  
Rec Start cannot be Moved. Rec Start essence mark cannot be moved.This appears when an attempt is made to move a  
Rec Start with a Move Shot Mark operation. Move Shot Mark can move only Shot Mark1 and  
Shot Mark2 marks.  
Clip is Locked.  
The clip is locked.  
This appears when an attempt is made to delete a clip, set the clip thumbnail, or delete a shot  
mark when the clip is locked.  
All Clips are Locked.  
All Clips are Unlocked.  
All clips are locked.  
This appears when an attempt is made to execute a Lock All Clips operation when all clips are  
already locked.  
All clips are unlocked.  
This appears when an attempt is made to execute an Unlock All Clips operation when all clips  
are already unlocked.  
Alarms relating to audio and video signals  
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor screen Action  
a)  
INPUT VIDEO IS NOT DETECTED.  
CHECK THE VIDEO INPUT MODE AND  
SUPPLY A VIDEO SIGNAL TO VIDEO  
INPUT.  
• Check the setting of V INPUT on Page P1 VIDEO of  
the function menu (see page 40).  
• Input an HDSDI signal.  
No INPUT!  
a)  
INPUT AUDIO EMPHASIS IS NOT  
SUPPORTED.  
Check the emphasis of the audio input signal.  
EMPHASIS!  
CHECK THE EMPHASIS OF THE AUDIO  
INPUT SIGNAL.  
121  
Troubleshooting  
 
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor screen Action  
REF NON-STD  
A NON-STANDARD REF SIGNAL IS  
BEING USED FOR REF VIDEO. USE A  
STANDARD SIGNAL.  
Input a standard signal.  
a) Displayed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to  
“on”.  
Alarms relating to sensors and drives  
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor acreen Description/action  
FAN Stopped  
DR-FAN Stop  
N-FAN Stop  
FAN MOTOR STOPPED.  
Contact a Sony service representative.  
Note  
DRIVE FAN MOTOR STOPPED.  
The unit will not stop operating, but if you continue to  
use it in this state temperatures inside the unit or the  
drive will rise, possibly resulting in failure or fire.  
FAN MOTOR ON NET-4 BOARD  
STOPPED.  
High TEMP!  
HIGH TEMPERATURE.  
HIGH TEMPERATURE IN DRIVE.  
HIGH TEMPERATURE ON NET-4 BOARD.  
MOISTURE HAS BEEN DETECTED.  
HUMID!  
Stop recording or playback, power the unit off and on  
again, and wait until the HUMID display disappears.  
BATT EMPTY!  
Unknown USB  
BATTERY EMPTY!  
Change the battery.  
UNKNOWN USB DEVICE.  
The USB connector of this unit is for maintenance  
purposes only. Do not connect a USB device for any  
purpose other than maintenance.  
Alarms related to system frequency  
Alarm message in time  
data display area  
Alarm message in video monitor screen Action  
1080/59.94i  
1080/50i  
RECORDING AND PLAYBACK IS NOT  
POSSIBLE.SYSTEM FREQUENCY  
SELECTION DIFFER FROM IT ON DISC. disc with the same system frequency as the unit, or  
change the unit's system frequency.  
This appears when the system frequency selection of  
the unit differs from that of the loaded disc.Insert a  
122  
Troubleshooting  
Error messages  
Specifications  
Error codes appear in the time data display when an error  
(usually a hardware problem) occurs. In addition, both  
error messages and error codes appear in the monitor video  
section and on the video monitor connected to the unit.  
When an error message appears, follow the instructions in  
the error message to resolve the problem.  
General  
External dimensions (w/h/d, excluding projections)  
1
3
5
210×132×396 mm (8 / ×5 / ×15 /  
8
4
8
inches)  
Error code  
E r r o r 5 0 - 0 1 0  
Error code in time data display area  
ERROR  
AN ERROR HAS BEEN  
DETECTED. INFORM SERVICE  
OF FOLLOWING CODE:  
50-010  
PRESS EJECT KEY  
TO EJECT DISC.  
Error code  
Example error in video monitor screen  
3
210 (8 / )  
8
in mm (inches)  
Mass  
6.5 kg (14 lb. 5 oz.)  
Power requirements  
To eject discs with the unit powered  
off  
100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
12 V DC  
Power consumption  
As an emergency measure, disc cartridges can be removed  
with the unit powered off. This operation should always be  
done by a trained service technician.  
AC operation: 80 W  
DC operation: 65 W  
(Power saving mode: 55 W)  
Peak inrush current  
(1) Power ON, current probe method:  
45 A (240 V), 18 A (100 V)  
(2) Hot switching inrush current,  
measured in accordance with  
European standard EN55103-1: 11 A  
(230 V)  
Operating temperature  
5ºC to 40ºC (41ºF to 104ºF)  
Storage temperature  
–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to +140ºF)  
Operating relative humidity  
25 to 90%  
System  
Recording/playback format  
Video MPEG HD 422: 50 Mbps  
123  
Specifications  
             
Proxy video  
Audio  
MPEG-4  
MPEG HD 422: 24 bits, 48 kHz, 8  
channels  
Dynamic range 90 dB or more  
Distortion  
0.05% or less (at 1 kHz)  
Proxy audio  
A-law 8 bits, 8 kHz, 8 channels  
Input connectors  
Recording/playback times  
PFD23A discs Approx. 43 minutes  
PFD50DLA discs  
Digital video inputs  
HDSDI INPUT  
BNC type (×1), complying with SMPTE-  
Approx. 95 minutes  
292M  
(i.LINK) S400  
Note  
6-pin type (×1), complying with IEEE  
1394  
The recording and playback times listed above are  
approximate. Maximum recording times may vary  
depending on recording conditions.  
Analog video inputs  
REF.VIDEO INPUT  
BNC type (×2, loop-through),  
Search speed  
HD Tri-level sync (0.6 Vp-p/75 Ω/sync  
negative), SD black burst, or SD  
composite sync (0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω/  
sync negative)  
Jog mode  
Variable-speed mode  
–2 to +2 times normal speed  
Shuttle mode –20 to +20 times normal speed  
Fast forward mode  
–1 to +1 times normal speed  
Analog audio inputs  
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT 1, 2  
XLR 3-pin, female (×2), +4 dBu, high  
impedance, balanced  
+35 times normal speed  
Fast reverse mode  
–35 times normal speed  
Digital audio inputs  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) IN 1/2, 3/4  
BNC type (×2), 1/2ch, 3/4ch complying  
with AES-3id-1995  
Video performance  
Sampling frequency  
Y: 74.25 MHz, R–Y/B–Y: 37.125 MHz  
Quantization  
8 bits/sample  
Compression MPEG-2 4:2:2P@HL  
Timecode input  
TIME CODE IN  
Composite output  
BNC type (×1), SMPTE timecode, 0.5 to  
Frequency response  
18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ, unbalanced  
0.5 to 5.75 MHz+0.5/–2.0 dB  
53 dB or more  
20 ns or less  
S/N (Y)  
Y/C delay  
Output connectors  
K-factor (K2T) 1.0% or less  
Digital video outputs  
HDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2(SUPER)  
Processor adjustment range  
BNC type (×2), complying with SMPTE-  
292M  
Video level  
Chroma level to +3 dB  
Set up/black level  
to +3 dB  
SDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2(SUPER)  
BNC type (×2), complying with SMPTE-  
259M  
30 IRE/ 210 mV  
30°  
Chroma phase  
Analog video outputs  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT 1, 2(SUPER)  
System phase SYNC: 15 µs  
SC: 0 to +400 ns  
BNC type (×2), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, sync  
negative, complying with SMPTE-  
170M  
Audio performance  
Sampling frequency  
48 kHz  
Analog audio outputs  
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT 1, 2  
XLR 3-pin, male (×2), +4 dBu, 600 Ω,  
low impedance, balanced  
AUDIO MONITOR  
Quantization  
Headroom  
24 bits  
–20/–18/–16/–12 dB (selectable)  
Frequency response  
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5/–1.0 dB (0 dB at  
1 kHz)  
XLR 3-pin, male (×2), +4 dBu, 600 Ω,  
low impedance, balanced  
124  
Specifications  
PHONES  
Stereo phone jack (×1), –to –13 dBu,  
BP-L80S Battery Pack  
BP-GL95 Battery Pack  
BKP-L551 Battery Adaptor  
8 Ω, unbalanced  
Digital audio outputs  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUTPUT 1/2, 3/4  
BNC type (×2), 1/2 ch, 3/4 ch complying  
with AES-3id-1995  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Timecode output  
TIME CODE OUT  
Notes  
• Always make a test recording, and verify that it was  
recorded successfully. SONY WILL NOT BE  
LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON  
ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS  
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE  
SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR  
STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT  
OF ANY TYPE.  
BNC type (×1), SMPTE timecode,  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced  
Remote control connectors  
REMOTE(9P) D-sub 9-pin, female (×1), complying  
with RS-422A  
VIDEO CONTROL  
D-sub 9-pin, female (×1), complying  
with EIA RS-423  
• Always verify that the unit is operating properly  
before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR  
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE  
LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS  
DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER  
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER  
EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR FOR  
ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER.  
REMOTE  
Network  
4-pin, female (×1)  
DC 12 V, 7.5 W  
RJ-45 type (×1)  
1000BASE-T: complying with  
IEEE802.3ab  
100BASE-TX: complying with  
IEEE802.3u  
10BASE-T: complying with IEEE802.3  
Other  
MAINTENANCE connectors  
(High Speed USB (USB 2.0) Type-A)  
Accessories supplied  
Operation manuals  
English version (1)  
Japanese version (1)  
CD-ROM manual (1)  
Installation manual (1)  
XDCAM Application Software CD-ROM (1)  
Connector caps  
Accessories not supplied  
AC power cord  
• For the customers in the U.S.A and Canada  
Part number 1-551-812-41 (125 V, 10 A, about 2.4 m)  
• For the customers in the United Kingdom  
Part number 1-777-823-12 (250 V, 10 A, about 2.0 m)  
• For the customers in European countries other than the  
United Kingdom  
Part number 1-551-631-61 (250 V, 10 A, about 2.0 m)  
RCC-G5 9-pin Remote Control Cable  
RM-280 Remote Edit Controller  
PFD23A Professional Disc  
PFD50DLA Dual-layer Professional Disc  
125  
Specifications  
   
Using PDZ-1 Proxy  
Browsing Software  
When a computer with the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing  
Software installed is connected to this unit, you can  
transfer the proxy AV data and metadata files recorded on  
a disc to the computer. On the computer side, PDZ-1  
enables you to browse the proxy AV data, add or modify  
metadata (titles, comments, essence marks, etc.), or create  
a clip list.  
The modified metadata and the created clip list can then be  
written back to the disc loaded in this unit.  
For more information about PDZ-1 functions and  
operations, refer to the PDZ-1 help.  
System requirements  
The following are required to use PDZ-1.  
• Computer: PC with Intel Pentium M processor, at least 1  
GHz (installed memory: at least 512 MB)  
• Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP Professional  
SP2 or higher, Windows Vista Ultimate/Business (32  
bit), or Mac OS X v10.4.11 or higher  
• Web browser: Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 or higher  
• DirectX: DirectX 8.1b or higher  
To install PDZ-1  
Insert the supplied XDCAM Application Software CD-  
ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer, and then  
run the installer in the PDZ-1 directory of the CD-ROM.  
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the  
CDROM disc.  
Notes  
• Make sure that the hard disk drive on which the work  
folder to store the material transferred from this unit has  
adequate free space.  
• To transfer files between the computer and this unit  
requires this unit’s IP address and other network-related  
settings to be made.  
For details of the network-related settings, see “To change  
126  
Using PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software  
         
Using UMID Data  
Metadata is additional information recorded on discs along  
with audio-visual data. It is used to bring greater efficiency  
to the flow of operations from material acquisition through  
editing, and to make it easier to find and reuse material.  
As one of application of metadata, the UMID has been  
internationally standardized.  
What is a UMID?  
A UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a unique i-  
dentifier for audio-visual material defined by the  
SMPTE-330M-2003 standard.  
A UMID may be either as a 32-byte Basic UMID or an  
Extended UMID, which includes an additional 32 bytes of  
Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes.  
For details, refer to SMPTE-330M.  
Extended UMID (64 bytes)  
Basic UMID (32 bytes)  
Instance  
Source Pack (32 bytes)  
Spatial  
Coordinates  
Time/Date  
8 bytes  
Universal label  
12 bytes  
L
Material Number  
Country Org  
User  
No.  
4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes  
1
16 bytes  
3 bytes  
12 bytes  
A globally unique ID is automatically recorded for every  
clip.  
The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional  
information such as location, time/date, company ID and  
so on.  
The UMID is applied as follows.  
Material No.  
ID generated when  
shooting  
Source Pack  
Shooting  
information (when,  
where and who)  
Same as the above  
Instance No.  
Same as the above  
Original material: 00 00 00  
Copied material: generation number (1 byte)  
+ random number (2 bytes)  
Distinguish between the  
original material and copied  
material  
Material source ID/  
detecting material  
Metadata pack that  
identifies the source of  
material unit by defining the  
when, where and who of  
the material unit with which  
it is associated.  
Using the Extended UMID  
Functions of UMID data  
UMID data enables the following:  
• Addition of a globally unique ID to every clip of audio-  
visual material. The unique ID is used to detect the  
material source and to link it with the original source  
material.  
You have to enter a country code, organization code and  
user code. Set the country code referring to the table in ISO  
3166, and set the organization code and user code  
according to the guidelines of your organization.  
• Distinguishing between original material and copied  
material. 00 is added to the Instance Number for original  
material.  
127  
Using UMID Data  
       
• Recording with UTC time. UTC (coordinated universal  
time) is used when recording the UMID. Use of a  
universal time system enables uniform management of  
source material recorded all over the world.  
• Calculation of date differences. Source material is  
recorded using modified Julian dates (MJD), which  
enables easy calculation of date differences between  
different source material items.  
About the UMID ownership information  
COUNTRY (country code)  
Set the country code by entering an abbreviated  
alphanumeric string (4-byte alphanumeric string)  
according to the values defined in ISO 3166-1.  
There are about 240 country codes.  
Find your own country code on the following web page.  
Refer to ISO 3166-1:  
http://www.iso.org/iso/country-codes/  
iso_3166_code_lists.htm  
Setting UMID ownership information  
Proceed as follows.  
1
Set setup menu item 029 STORE OWNER to “on”  
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the active part  
of the code occupies the first part of the 4 bytes and the  
remainder must be filled with the space character (20h).  
The STORED OWNERSHIP (UMID ownership  
information setting) screen appears.  
Example: Japan  
For Japan, the country code is JP, which is 2 bytes, or JPN,  
RETURN  
which is 3 bytes.  
Thus, enter the following:  
ITEM-029  
SELECT  
JP_ _  
STORED OWNERSHIP  
or  
JPN _  
*COUNTRY  
ORGANIZATION  
USER  
-
-
-
where _ represents a space.  
SAVE  
EXIT  
ORGANIZATION (organization code)  
Enter a 4-byte alphanumeric string for the organization  
code.  
SETUP  
COUNTRY: Sets the country code.  
ORGANIZATION: Sets the organization code.  
USER: Sets the user code  
Notes  
• There are no problems in recording or playing back  
audio-video signals, even if the ORGANIZATION is not  
set.  
See the next item “About the UMID ownership  
information” for more information about these codes.  
• Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the  
SMPTE registration office. When no organization code  
has been acquired, it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary  
string. As a rule, the code “00” must be entered.  
Freelance operators who do not belong to an origination  
should enter “~”.  
2
3
Use the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob to select the item to  
set and the character input location, then press the  
knob.  
Use the PUSH SET(S.SEL) knob, – or + function  
button (F3 or F4) to select characters to input at the  
selected location.  
USER (user code)  
Enter a 4-byte alphanumeric string to identify the user.  
The user code is registered with each organization locally.  
It is usually not centrally registered.  
To delete all input data  
Press the RESET/RETURN button.  
When the user code is less than 4 bytes, enter the user code  
at the beginning of the 4 bytes and fill the remainder of the  
string with the space character (20h).  
4
Press SAVE function button (F5).  
This user code is determined by the organization. The  
methods used depend on the organization.  
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears, and the  
ownership information is saved.  
See “Setup Menu” (page 90) for more information about  
setup menu operations.  
Note  
User code cannot be entered when no organization code  
has been entered.  
128  
Using UMID Data  
 
About IJG (Independent JPEG  
Group)  
Trademarks and Licenses  
This software is based in part on the work of the  
Independent JPEG.  
MPEG-4 visual patent portfolio  
license  
Character display software “iType”  
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4  
VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE  
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A  
CONSUMER FOR  
This product includes technology from Monotype Imaging  
®
Inc., including iType and certain fonts.  
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE  
MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)  
AND/OR  
(ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS  
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A  
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY  
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO  
PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE  
MPEG-4 VIDEO.  
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED  
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL  
INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO  
PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL  
USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM  
MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM  
MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i) manufacturing/sales of any storage  
media storing MPEG-4 Visual video information (ii) distribution/  
broadcasting of MPEG-4 Visual video information in any manner (such as  
online video distribution service, internet broadcasting, TV broadcasting).  
Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from  
MPEGLA. Please contact MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA,  
L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO  
80206, http://www.mpegla.com  
MPEG-2 video patent portfolio  
license  
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN  
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER  
THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD  
FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR  
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED  
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE  
PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2 PATENT PORTFOLIO,  
WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA,  
L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,  
COLORADO 80206.  
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage media storing MPEG-2 video  
information such as DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general  
consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the PACKAGED MEDIA need to  
obtain licenses for their own business from MPEG LA. Please contact MPEG  
LA for any further information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,  
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206  
http://www.mpegla.com  
129  
Trademarks and Licenses  
         
For more efficient searches,  
XDCAM equipment records essence  
marks as part of Non-RealTime  
metadata, and uses them to display  
thumbnails.  
automatically whenever high-  
resolution MPEG HD data is  
recorded.  
Glossary  
Reference video signal  
AES/EBU  
A video signal that contains a sync  
signal or sync and burst signals, used  
as a reference for synchronization of  
video equipment.  
A standard established jointly by the  
AES (Audio Engineering Society)  
and EBU (European Broadcasting  
Union) for serial transmission of  
digital audio. Two channels of audio  
can be transmitted via a single  
connector.  
HD tri-level sync  
An HDTV analog reference signal  
that applies to 59.94/50Hz systems.  
A sync signal defined in SMPTE-  
274M with positive, negative, and  
zero values.  
SDSDI signal  
SD Serial Digital Interface. An  
interface standardized as SMPTE-  
259M which enables the  
transmission of an uncompressed  
digital component stream.  
HDSDI signal  
Abbreviation of HD Serial Digital  
Interface.  
A signal in the HDTV serial interface  
defined by SMPTE-292M.  
Clip  
A recording unit. Clips are created  
every time recording starts and stops.  
S/N  
Clip list  
Signal-to-Noise ratio. The relation of  
the strength of the desired signal to  
the accompanying electronic  
interference, the noise. If S/N is high,  
sounds are reproduced with less noise  
and pictures are reproduced clearly  
without snow.  
A list of locations in the material  
recorded on the disc, arranged in any  
order. Clip lists can be created with  
the scene selection function of this  
unit, and with the PDZ-1 Proxy  
Browsing Software.  
Metadata  
Information about the properties of  
video and audio content. XDCAM  
records metadata such as UMIDs and  
essence marks, and the PDZ-1 Proxy  
Browsing Software can be used to  
record information such as titles and  
comments.  
Composite video signal  
A video signal in which luminance  
and chrominance are combined along  
with timing reference “sync”  
information to make composite  
video.  
Sub clip  
One of the sections which make up a  
clip list. A sub clip may be part of a  
clip or an entire clip.  
MXF  
Material eXchange Format. A file  
exchange format developed by the  
Pro-MPEG Forum. Equipment from  
different manufacturers can  
exchange files in this format.  
Thumbnail image  
A reduced still picture of video for  
display on a GUI screen. XDCAM  
creates thumbnail images from proxy  
video, and displays them as index  
pictures on GUI screens.  
Drop-frame mode  
SMPTE timecode runs at 30 frames/  
second, while the NTSC color  
television system runs at about 29.97  
frames/second. Drop-frame mode  
adjusts the running of timecode to  
eliminate the discrepancy between  
timecode value and actual time by  
dropping two frames from the  
timecode value at the beginning of  
each minute except every tenth  
minute.  
Non-audio  
General term for audio signals other  
1)  
than linear PCM, such as Dolby E  
and Dolby Digital (AC-3).  
1)  
Timecode  
A digitally encoded signal which is  
recorded with video data to identify  
each frame of the video by hour,  
minute, second and frame number.  
SMPTE timecode is applied to NTSC  
system, and EBU timecode to PAL  
and SECAM systems.  
XDCAM can record non-audio as an  
input signal.  
1) Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.  
Non-drop-frame mode  
A mode of advancing timecode  
which ignores the difference in frame  
values between real time and the  
timecode. Using this mode produces  
a difference of approximately 86  
seconds per day between real time  
and timecode, which causes  
problems when editing programs in  
units of seconds using the number of  
frames as a reference.  
E-E mode  
UMID  
Electric-to-Electric mode. When you  
operate a VDR in E-E mode, input  
video and/or audio signals pass  
through electric circuits only and  
then come out from the output  
connectors, without passing through  
electromagnetic conversion circuits  
such as recording heads.  
Unique Material Identifier. A  
standard (SMPTE-330M) for video  
and audio metadata. The Basic  
section of a UMID contains a  
globally unique number and a  
material number for the identification  
of recorded material. An optional  
section called the “Source Pack”  
contains information such as the time  
and location of recording. A UMID  
with the Basic section only is called a  
Basic UMID. A UMID with the  
Proxy AV data  
Low-resolution data with a video  
bandwidth of 1.5 Mbps and an audio  
bandwidth of 64 kbps per channel.  
This unit records proxy AV data  
Essence mark  
A type of metadata that may be set for  
a specified frame.  
Glossary  
130  
   
Source Pack is called an Extended  
UMID.  
User bits  
A total of 32 bits are provided in the  
timecode which the user can use to  
record such information as date, reel  
number, or scene number on video  
tape or disc. Also called user’s bits.  
VBID (Video Blanking ID)  
This is a video ID signal, defined in  
the EIAJ CPR-1204 standard, which  
is inserted into VBS video output to  
enable the aspect ratio to be detected.  
The ID signal is inserted into line 20,  
VBI 283.  
131  
Glossary  
ejecting with the unit powered off  
123  
Index  
Clip List  
A
Accessories  
Analog  
DISPLAY  
audio signal input/output section  
22  
ANALOG AUDIO  
Audio  
Audio level  
AUDIO MONITOR R, L connectors  
22  
COMPOSITE OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER)  
connectors 21  
E
Editing  
Essence mark  
using the editing function of  
recorder 32  
B
Expand  
returning to factory default  
settings 96  
Battery  
D
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
Digital audio signal input/output  
section 23  
DISC MENU  
C
F
CH-1/ALL CH, CH-2 to CH-4  
adjustment knobs 13  
Chapter  
File access mode (FAM) connections  
28  
File Operations in File Access Mode  
(for Macintosh) 82  
132  
Index  
 
Index picture  
P
File Operations in File Access Mode  
(for Windows) 80  
PDZ-1  
J
Jog  
recording continuous timecode  
89  
K
L
Playback condition  
recording continuous timecode  
89  
M
Maintenance  
Preparation  
R
G
HDSDI remote control function  
45  
H
N
Network  
HDSDI  
OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER)  
connectors 23  
assigningIPaddressautomatically  
111  
Recording and playback control  
section 16  
I
O
IN  
OUT  
Index  
133  
TIME CODE  
S
Scene  
SDSDI OUTPUT 1, 2 (SUPER)  
connectors 22  
Setup menu  
recording external timecode  
directly 36  
recording sequentially upon the  
36  
Shuttle  
recording with the internal  
synchronized 36  
U
SUB CLIP  
User bits  
V
W
T
THUMBNAIL  
Thumbnail  
selecting information displayed  
61  
134  
Index  
The material contained in this manual consists of information  
that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely  
for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this  
manual.  
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any  
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose  
other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment  
described in this manual without the express written  
permission of Sony Corporation.  
PDW-HD1500  
(SYL)  
Sony Corporation  
3-282-299-01 (1)  
© 2008  

Sony VAIO VPCSB User Manual
Seagate BARRACUDA ST3750840AS User Manual
Seagate BARRACUDA ES SERIAL ATA ST3400620NS User Manual
Samsung SPINPOINT MP2 HM080HJ User Manual
Samsung GT C3312 User Manual
Samsung Galaxy Note 2014 SMP6000ZKVXAR User Manual(1)
Salton JVPM1B User Manual
RCA RP5420 User Manual
OtterBox Cell Phone Accessories Blackberry Tour User Manual
Nokia 6590i User Manual